Ford Automobile 2005 E 150 User Manual

Table of Contents  
Table of Contents  
Introduction  
4
Instrument Cluster  
12  
Warning and control lights  
Gauges  
12  
15  
Entertainment Systems  
18  
AM/FM stereo  
18  
20  
22  
25  
AM/FM stereo cassette  
AM/FM stereo with CD  
AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD  
Climate Controls  
39  
Heater only  
Manual heating and air conditioning  
39  
40  
Lights  
42  
Headlamps  
Turn signal control  
Bulb replacement  
42  
46  
47  
Driver Controls  
52  
Windshield wiper/washer control  
Steering wheel adjustment  
Power windows  
Mirrors  
Speed control  
52  
53  
57  
57  
59  
Locks and Security  
62  
Keys  
Locks  
62  
62  
1
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Maintenance and Specifications  
197  
Engine compartment  
Engine oil  
Battery  
Fuel information  
Air filter(s)  
Part numbers  
Refill capacities  
Lubricant specifications  
199  
200  
203  
211  
226  
227  
228  
233  
Accessories  
Index  
240  
243  
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical  
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval  
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written  
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without  
notice and without incurring obligation.  
Copyright © 2004 Ford Motor Company  
3
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Introduction  
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning  
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and  
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to  
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other  
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and  
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known  
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other  
reproductive harm.  
CONGRATULATIONS  
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get  
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more  
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and  
pleasure you will derive from driving it.  
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the  
following website:  
In the United States: www.ford.com  
In Canada: www.ford.ca  
In Australia: www.ford.com.au  
In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx  
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.  
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available  
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your  
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe  
options before they are generally available.  
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It  
is an integral part of the vehicle.  
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the  
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the  
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.  
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump  
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.  
4
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION  
Warning symbols in this guide  
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In  
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments  
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be  
read and observed.  
Warning symbols on your vehicle  
When you see this symbol, it is  
imperative that you consult the  
relevant section of this guide before  
touching or attempting adjustment  
of any kind.  
Protecting the environment  
We must all play our part in  
protecting the environment. Correct  
vehicle usage and the authorized  
disposal of waste, cleaning and  
lubrication materials are significant  
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this  
guide with the tree symbol.  
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE  
During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving, maintain speeds below  
70 mph (110 km/h) and vary speeds frequently. This is recommended to  
give the moving parts a chance to break in. Do not tow a trailer during  
this break-in period. For more information regarding trailer towing, refer  
to Trailer towing in the Driving chapter.  
5
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
SPECIAL NOTICES  
Emission warranty  
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper Coverage,  
Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 6.0L Power Stroke  
Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible for Emissions  
Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a detailed description  
of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to the Warranty Guide  
that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.  
Service Data Recording  
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and  
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially  
includes information about the performance or status of various systems  
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake  
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford  
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may  
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your  
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.  
Event Data Recording  
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of  
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The  
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.  
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the  
occupants, potentially including information such as:  
how various systems in your vehicle were operating;  
whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;  
how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the  
brake pedal;  
how fast the vehicle was traveling; and  
where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.  
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected  
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do  
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,  
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,  
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful  
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information  
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.  
6
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Special instructions  
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic  
controls.  
Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS)  
in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to follow  
the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.  
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should  
NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger air bag.  
Notice to owners of diesel-powered vehicles  
Read the 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s  
Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation and  
maintenance of your Diesel-powered light truck.  
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles  
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than  
other types of vehicles.  
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.  
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,  
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle  
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.  
7
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Using your vehicle as an ambulance  
If your light truck is equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation  
Package, it may be utilized as an ambulance. Ford urges ambulance  
manufacturers to follow the recommendations of the Ford Incomplete  
Vehicle Manual, Ford Truck Body Builder’s Layout Book and the  
Qualified Vehicle Modifiers (QVM) Guidelines as well as pertinent  
supplements. For additional information, please contact the Truck Body  
Builders Advisory Service at 1–877–840–4338.  
Use of your Ford light truck as an ambulance, without the Ford  
Ambulance Preparation Package voids the Ford New Vehicle Limited  
Warranty and may void the Emissions Warranties. In addition, ambulance  
usage without the preparation package could cause high underbody  
temperatures, overpressurized fuel and a risk of spraying fuel which  
could lead to fires.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the  
Ford Ambulance Preparation  
Package, it will be indicated on the  
Certification label. The label is  
located on the driver’s side door  
pillar or on the rear edge of the  
driver’s door. You can determine  
whether the ambulance  
manufacturer followed Ford’s  
recommendations by directly  
contacting that manufacturer. Ford  
Ambulance Preparation Package is  
only available on certain 6.0L Diesel  
engine equipped vehicles.  
8
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Using your vehicle as a stationary power source (PTO)  
Refer to the Driving chapter for more information and guidelines for  
operating a vehicle equipped with an aftermarket power take-off system.  
Middle East/North Africa vehicle specific information  
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with  
features and options that are different from the ones that are described  
in this Owner’s Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that  
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided  
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations  
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this  
Owner’s Guide for all other required information and warnings.  
9
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.  
Vehicle Symbol Glossary  
Safety Alert  
See Owner’s Guide  
Air Bag-Front  
Child Seat  
Fasten Safety Belt  
Air Bag-Side  
Child Seat Installation  
Warning  
Child Seat Lower  
Anchor  
Child Seat Tether  
Anchor  
Brake System  
Brake Fluid -  
Non-Petroleum Based  
Anti-Lock Brake System  
Powertrain Malfunction  
Master Lighting Switch  
Fog Lamps-Front  
Speed Control  
Hazard Warning Flasher  
Fuse Compartment  
Windshield Wash/Wipe  
Fuel Pump Reset  
Windshield  
Rear Window  
Defrost/Demist  
Defrost/Demist  
10  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Vehicle Symbol Glossary  
Power Window Lockout  
Interior Luggage  
Power Windows  
Front/Rear  
Child Safety Door  
Lock/Unlock  
Compartment Release  
Symbol  
Panic Alarm  
Engine Oil  
Engine Coolant  
Temperature  
Engine Coolant  
Do Not Open When Hot  
Battery  
Avoid Smoking, Flames,  
or Sparks  
Battery Acid  
Fan Warning  
Explosive Gas  
MAX  
MIN  
Maintain Correct Fluid  
Level  
Power Steering Fluid  
Emission System  
Engine Air Filter  
Jack  
Passenger Compartment  
Air Filter  
Check fuel cap  
11  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Instrument Cluster  
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES  
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may  
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may  
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.  
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the  
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have the  
respective system inspected immediately.  
If your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel engine, it has a unique cluster,  
refer to Starting the engine in your 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct  
Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement.  
Service engine soon: The Service  
engine soon indicator light  
illuminates when the ignition is first  
turned to the ON position to check  
the bulb. Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On  
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to  
On board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications  
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could  
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid  
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced  
immediately.  
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures  
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior  
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.  
12  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Electronic throttle control (if  
equipped): Illuminates when the  
engine has defaulted to a  
’limp-home’ operation. Report the  
fault to a dealer at the earliest opportunity.  
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when  
the fuel cap may not be properly  
installed. Continued driving with  
this light on may cause the Service  
Engine Soon warning light to come  
on, refer to Fuel filler cap in the  
Maintenance and Specification chapter.  
Brake system warning light: To  
confirm the brake system warning  
light is functional, it will  
momentarily illuminate when the  
ignition is turned to the ON position  
!
P
BRAKE  
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,  
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON  
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this  
time, seek service immediately from your dealership. Illumination after  
releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake  
system should be inspected immediately by your servicing dealership.  
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is  
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may  
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle  
checked by your dealer immediately.  
Anti-lock brake system: If the  
ABS light stays illuminated or  
ABS  
continues to flash, a malfunction has  
been detected, have the system  
serviced immediately. Normal braking  
is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated.  
Air bag readiness: If this light fails  
to illuminate when ignition is turned  
to ON, continues to flash or remains  
on, have the system serviced  
immediately. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the  
supplemental restraint system has been detected.  
13  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten  
your safety belt. A chime will also  
sound to remind you to fasten your  
safety belt.  
Charging system: Illuminates when  
the battery is not charging properly.  
Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel  
level in the fuel tank is at or near  
empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this  
chapter).  
Check gauge: Illuminates when any  
of the following conditions has  
occurred:  
CHECK  
GAGE  
The engine coolant temperature  
is high.  
The engine oil pressure is low.  
Flashes when Failsafe cooling mode has been activated.  
Turn signal: Illuminates when the  
left or right turn signal or the  
hazard lights are turned on. If the  
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.  
High beams: Illuminates when the  
high beam headlamps are turned on.  
Transmission control indicator  
light (TCIL): Illuminates when the  
OVERDRIVE  
overdrive function of the  
transmission has been turned off,  
refer to the Driving chapter. If the  
light flashes steadily or does not illuminate, have the transmission  
serviced soon, or damage may occur.  
14  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the  
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door  
is opened.  
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking  
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the  
driver’s door is opened.  
Parking brake ON warning chime: Sounds when the parking brake is  
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5  
km).  
GAUGES  
Speedometer: Indicates the  
current vehicle speed.  
15  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Engine coolant temperature  
gauge: Indicates engine coolant  
temperature. At normal operating  
temperature, the needle will be in  
the normal range (between “H” and  
“C”). If it enters the red section,  
the engine is overheating. Stop  
the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and  
let the engine cool.  
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is  
running or hot.  
Odometer: Registers the total miles  
(kilometers) of the vehicle.  
Trip odometer: Registers the miles  
(kilometers) of individual journeys.  
Press the SELECT/RESET control  
once to switch from the odometer to  
the trip odometer. Press the control  
again to select Trip A and Trip B features. To reset the trip, press and  
hold the control again until the trip reading is 0.0 miles.  
Tachometer: Indicates the engine  
speed in revolutions per minute.  
Driving with your tachometer  
pointer continuously at the top of  
the scale may damage the engine.  
16  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Cluster  
Battery voltage gauge: Indicates  
the battery voltage when the  
ignition is in the ON position. If the  
pointer moves and stays outside the  
normal operating range, have the  
vehicle’s electrical system checked  
as soon as possible.  
Engine oil pressure gauge:  
Indicates engine oil pressure. The  
needle should stay in the normal  
operating range (between “L” and  
“H”). If the needle falls below the  
normal range, stop the vehicle, turn  
off the engine and check the engine  
H
L
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle  
checked at your dealership or by a qualified technician.  
Fuel gauge: Indicates  
approximately how much fuel is left  
in the fuel tank (when the ignition  
is in the ON position). The fuel  
gauge may vary slightly when the  
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.  
The FUEL icon and arrow indicates  
which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.  
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications  
chapter for more information.  
17  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Entertainment Systems  
AM/FM STEREO (IF EQUIPPED)  
1. Seek: Press  
/
to find the  
next listenable station down/up the  
frequency band.  
2. Tune: Press  
/
to manually  
adjust the radio frequency down/up.  
3. AM/FM: Press to choose a  
frequency band in radio mode.  
AM/FM  
18  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
4. Memory preset buttons: To set  
a station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,  
1
2
3
4
press and hold a preset button until sound returns.  
5. Power/volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF; turn to increase or  
decrease volume levels.  
VOL  
PUSH  
ON  
VOL  
PUSH  
ON  
6. Tone: Press TONE until the  
desired level — Bass, Treble, Fade  
TONE  
CLK  
appears on the display. Turn the  
volume control to raise/lower the  
levels, or to move the audio sound  
from the right to left or the front to  
back (if equipped).  
7. CLK (Clock): To set the hour,  
press and hold CLK until CLOCK  
SET appears in the display. Press  
TONE  
CLK  
SEEK to decrease  
increase the hours.  
To set the minute, press and hold CLK until CLOCK SET appears in the  
or  
display. Press TUNE to decrease  
or increase  
the minutes.  
19  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
AM/FM STEREO CASSETTE (IF EQUIPPED)  
12  
13 14 15 16 17  
1
2
3
4
VOL - PUSH ON  
ST  
CLK  
AM  
FM  
FM1  
BASS  
TREB  
BAL  
FADE  
TAPE  
AMS  
11  
SEEK  
TUNE  
SIDE  
REW  
1 - 2  
FF  
SCAN  
EJ  
10  
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
7
8
1. Balance: Press to shift sound to  
the left/right speakers.  
2. Fade: Press to shift sound to the  
rear/front speakers.  
3. CLK: To set the hour, press and  
hold CLK. Then press SEEK to  
CLK  
decrease  
hours.  
or increase  
the  
To set the minute, press and hold CLK and press TUNE to decrease  
or increase the minutes.  
20  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
TAPE  
AMS  
4. Tape AMS: In tape mode, press  
and hold to activate Automatic  
Music Search (allows you to quickly  
locate the beginning of the tape selection being played or to skip to the  
next selection). Then, press REW (for the beginning of the current  
selection) or FF (to advance to the next selection). The tape MUST have  
a blank section of at least four seconds duration between programs.  
5. Side 1–2: Press to change tape  
direction.  
SIDE  
1 - 2  
6. REW (rewind): Press to rewind  
the tape.  
REW  
FF (fast forward): Press to  
advance the tape.  
FF  
7. Memory preset buttons: To set  
a station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station,  
press and hold a preset button until sound returns.  
8.  
Dolbynoise reduction: Works in tape mode only. Reduces tape  
noise and hiss; press to activate/deactivate.  
9. Scan: Press SCAN to hear a brief  
sampling of all listenable radio  
stations or all tape selections. Press  
again to stop.  
10. Tune: Works in radio mode only.  
Press TUNE  
/
to change  
frequency down/up  
11. Seek: Press and  
release  
/
for previous/next  
strong station, selection or track.  
12. Power/volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF; turn to increase or  
decrease volume levels.  
21  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
13. AM/FM: Press to choose a  
frequency band in radio mode.  
14. Bass: Press  
/
to  
decrease/increase the bass output.  
15. Treble: Press  
/
to  
decrease/increase the treble output.  
16. EJ (Eject): Press to eject a  
tape.  
EJ  
17. Cassette door: Insert a cassette into the cassette door.  
AM/FM STEREO / SINGLE CD RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)  
13  
16 17  
14  
1
2
3
4
15  
18  
VOL - PUSH ON  
AM  
FM  
ST  
SCN  
CLK  
FM1  
BASS  
TREB  
BAL  
FADE  
CD  
DISC  
12  
11  
SEEK  
TUNE  
EJ  
COMP  
CD  
CD  
SHUFFLE  
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
10  
9
8
7
22  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
1. Balance: Press  
/
to shift  
sound to the left/right speakers.  
2. Fade: Press  
/
to shift  
sound to the front/rear speakers.  
3. SCN (Scan): Press to hear a  
brief sampling of all listenable  
stations or CD tracks. Press again to  
stop.  
4. CLK: To set the hour, press and  
hold CLK and press SEEK to  
CLK  
decrease  
hours.  
or increase  
the  
To set the minute, press and hold CLK and press TUNE to decrease  
or increase the minutes.  
5. EJ (eject): Press to eject a CD.  
6. COMP (Compression): In CD  
mode, press to bring louder and  
softer levels into more comfortable  
listening level. The compression icon (c) will appear in the display.  
SHUFFLE  
7. Shuffle: Press to listen to the  
6
tracks on the CD in random order.  
Press again to turn off.  
8. Memory presets: To set a  
CD  
CD  
SHUFFLE  
6
1
2
3
4
5
station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM; tune to a station. Press and  
hold a preset button until sound returns. This radio is equipped with six  
station memory preset controls which allow you to set up to six AM  
stations and 12 FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).  
9. CD:  
Press and hold until  
desired point of a selection is  
reached.  
23  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
10.  
CD: Press and hold until  
desired point of a selection is  
reached.  
11. Tune: In radio mode, press to  
move up or down the frequency  
band in individual increments.  
12. Seek: Press and release  
SEEK  
/
for previous/next  
strong station, selection or track.  
13. Power/volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF; turn to increase or  
decrease volume levels.  
14. CD: Press to enter CD mode or  
to play a CD already loaded into the  
system.  
15. AM/FM: Press to choose a  
frequency band in radio mode.  
16. Bass: Press  
/
to  
increase/decrease the bass output.  
17. Treble: Press  
/
to  
increase/decrease the treble output.  
DISC  
18. CD slot: Insert a CD printed  
side up.  
CD units are designed to play  
commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only.  
Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and  
re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when  
used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a  
scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper  
(adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The  
label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is  
recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent  
24  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may  
damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information.  
PREMIUM IN-DASH SIX CD SOUND SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
15 16  
17  
1
2
3
4
DISC  
SHUF  
SCAN  
SEEK  
REW  
FF  
COMP  
MUTE  
EJ  
TUNE  
5
6
7
8
LOAD  
14  
13  
BASS  
BAL  
SEL  
TREB  
FADE  
PUSH ON  
CD  
AM  
FM  
MENU  
1
2
3
4
5
6
12 11  
10  
9
1. Seek: Press and release  
SEEK for previous/next  
/
strong station, or track of the  
current disc.  
2. Rewind: Press and hold until the  
desired point of a selection is  
reached.  
Fast forward: Press and hold until  
the desired point of a selection is  
reached.  
3. Comp (Compression): The compression feature operates in CD mode  
and brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent  
listening level. Press the COMP control until COMP ON is displayed.  
4. Mute: Press to MUTE the playing  
media. Press again return to playing  
media.  
25  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
5. Eject: Press to eject a CD. Press  
and hold to eject all loaded discs. If  
disc is not removed, it will reload  
into the system. Works with the ignition on or off.  
6. Bass: Press BASS; then press  
SEL  
/
to decrease/increase  
the bass output.  
Treble: Press TREB; then press  
SEL  
/
to decrease/increase  
the treble output.  
7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble,  
Balance and Fade controls to adjust  
levels. Use with MENU to set the  
clock and RDS function on/off.  
8. Balance: Press BAL; then press  
SEL  
/
to shift sound to the  
left/right speakers.  
Fade: Press FADE; then press  
SEL  
/
to shift sound to the  
rear/front speakers.  
9. Menu: Press MENU and SEL to  
access clock mode, RDS on/off,  
Traffic announcement mode,  
Program type mode, Shuffle and  
Compression mode.  
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio  
and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) recommend that FM radio  
broadcasters use RDS technology to transmit information. FM radio  
stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RDS  
technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired.  
Traffic: Allows you to hear traffic broadcasts. With the feature ON, press  
SEEK or SCAN to find a station broadcasting a traffic report (if it is  
broadcasting RDS data).Traffic information is not available in most  
U.S. markets.  
FIND Program type: Allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for a  
certain category of music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies,  
R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40.  
26  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Show TYPE: Displays the station’s call letters format.  
Shuffle: With a CD playing, press to play tracks in a random order.  
Press MENU until SHUF appears in the display. Use SEL to select SHUF  
DISC, SHUF TRAC or SHUF OFF.  
Compression: With a CD playing, this feature brings soft and loud CD  
passages together for a more consistent listening level. Press MENU until  
compression status is displayed. Press the SEL control to enable the  
compression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed. Press the SEL  
control again to disable the feature when COMPRESS ON is displayed.  
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS  
is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase (  
) or decrease (  
) the  
hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.  
10. Memory presets: To set a  
station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and  
hold a preset button until sound  
returns.  
11. CD: Press to select CD mode.  
12. AM/FM: Press to select  
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band. In CD  
mode, press to begin radio play.  
Autostet: Stores the six strongest stations without erasing your current  
presets. To activate, press and momentarily hold AM/FM. AUTOSET will  
flash in the display. The six strongest stations will fill the memory preset  
buttons for AM/FM1/FM2 if enough stations are available. If not, stations  
will be repeated.  
Press again to deactivate.  
13. Power/volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF; turn to increase or  
decrease volume levels.  
27  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
14. Load: Press LOAD to load a CD  
in the system. The display will read  
SELECT SLOT. Select the desired  
memory preset slot (1–6). The display will then read LOAD CD. Partially  
load the CD label side up and the system will pull the CD in. LOADING  
CD# will appear in the display. Press and hold LOAD to autoload up to  
six discs at once.  
15. Shuffle: Press to play tracks in  
random order.  
16. Scan: Press SCAN to move up  
the radio frequency band. SCAN  
automatically finds a station, plays it  
for five seconds, then moves to the next station. Press again to stop.  
CD: Press SCAN for a brief sampling of CD tracks. Press again to stop.  
17. Disc tune: Radio: Press  
or  
the radio frequency band. CD:  
Press to select the previous/next CD.  
to manually tune down or up  
/
SATELLITE COMPATIBLE AM/FM STEREO IN-DASH SINGLE  
CD/MP3 RADIO — LATE AVAILABILITY (IF EQUIPPED)  
28  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
1. SEEK: Press and release  
SEEK for previous/next  
/
strong station or track.  
2. TEXT: The filename (Fi), song  
title (So), artist text (Ar) or album  
text (AL) may be viewed while  
playing an MP3 selection. When MP3 selection text is shown on the  
message display, its corresponding text indicator (Fi, So, Ar, or AL) is  
shown in the elapsed time display. Press TEXT to scroll through the text  
fields. The display will scroll through all of the text in the current field  
before changing to the next field. (TEXT must be pressed within 3  
seconds of the previous press to proceed to the next/last text display.  
The last text field shown on the display will become the new display  
message default.  
TEXT is also available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your radio  
comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable Satellite  
reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satellite instructions  
are included with the dealer installed kit.  
Dealer installed satellite kit only available in the continental United  
States.  
3. AUX: Press to toggle between the  
current playing media and DVD (if  
equipped).  
4. MUTE: Press to MUTE playing  
media; press again to return to  
playing media.  
5. EJ: Press to eject a CD.  
6. Bass: Press BASS; then press  
SEL  
/
to decrease/increase  
the bass output.  
Treble: Press TREB; then press  
SEL  
/
to decrease/increase  
the treble output.  
29  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble,  
Balance, Fade and other menu  
selections.  
8. Balance: Press BAL; then press  
SEL  
/
to shift sound to the  
left/right speakers.  
Fade: Press FADE; then press  
SEL  
/
to shift sound to the  
rear/front speakers.  
9. Menu: Press MENU and SEL to  
access AUTOSET, Speed sensitive  
volume and Setting the clock.  
Autoset: Press MENU until AUTOSET appears in the display. Press SEL  
to toggle ON/OFF. Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations  
without losing your original manually set preset stations for  
AM/FM1/FM2. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station  
stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strong  
stations, the system will store the last one in the remaining presets.  
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT  
MINUTE is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase (  
) or decrease  
(
) the hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.  
Folder/Track mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU until MODE appears in  
the display. Use SEL to toggle between FOLDER (only tracks within  
selected folder are accessible) or TRACK (all tracks on disc are  
accessible) MODE.  
10. REPEAT: Repeats the current  
CD/MP3 track when active (ON).  
Press to show repeat status. Press  
again to toggle status.  
11. SHUFFLE: Plays CD/MP3  
tracks in random order when active  
(ON). Press to show shuffle status.  
Press again to toggle status.  
12. FOLDER  
: Press to access  
the next MP3 directory.  
30  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
13. FOLDER  
: Press to access  
the previous MP3 directory.  
14. FF(Fast forward): In CD/MP3  
mode, press until desired selection  
is reached.  
15. REW(Rewind): In CD/MP3  
mode, press until desired selection  
is reached.  
16. SAT (if equipped): Your radio  
comes equipped with Satellite Ready  
capability. The kit to enable the  
Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed satellite  
instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.  
Dealer installed satellite kit only available in the continental United  
States.  
17. BAND: Press to toggle between  
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.  
18. Memory presets: To set a  
station: Select frequency band; tune  
to a station, press and hold a preset  
button until sound returns.  
19. Power/volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF; turn to increase or  
decrease volume levels.  
20. CD: Press to enter CD mode.  
31  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12  
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,  
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not  
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular  
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs  
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted  
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to  
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be  
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive  
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your  
dealer for further information.  
21. COMP(Compression): Brings  
soft and loud CD passages together  
for a more consistent listening level  
when in CD mode. Press COMP to turn the feature ON/OFF.  
22. Scan: Press SCAN to hear a  
brief sampling of radio stations or  
CD/MP3 tracks. Press again to stop.  
23. CAT/Tune: Press  
or  
to  
manually tune down/up the radio frequency band.  
CAT: CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite Radio. Your  
radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable  
Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satellite  
instructions are included with the dealer installed kit.  
Dealer installed satellite kit only available in the continental United  
States.  
For information regarding SIRIUS Satellite Radio, please call toll-free  
888-539-SIRIUS (888-539-7474) or visit the SIRIUS website at  
www.siriusradio.com  
24. CD slot: Insert a CD with the label side up.  
32  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
PREMIUM SATELLITE COMPATIBLE AM/FM STEREO IN-DASH SIX  
CD/MP3 RADIO — LATE AVAILABILITY (IF EQUIPPED)  
1. SEEK: Press and release  
SEEK  
/
for previous/next  
strong station or track.  
2. TEXT: The filename (Fi), song  
title (So), artist text (Ar) or album  
text (AL) may be viewed while  
playing an MP3 selection. When MP3 selection text is shown on the  
message display, its corresponding text indicator (Fi, So, Ar, or AL) is  
shown in the elapsed time display. Press TEXT to scroll through the text  
fields. The display will scroll all of the text in the current field before  
changing to the next field. (TEXT must be pressed within 3 seconds of  
the previous button press to proceed to the next/last text display.)  
TEXT is also available when equipped with Satellite radio. Your radio  
comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit to enable Satellite  
reception is available through your dealer. Detailed Satellite instructions  
are included with the dealer installed kit. Dealer installed satellite kit  
only available in the continental United States.  
33  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
3. AUX: Press to toggle between the  
current playing media and DVD (if  
equipped).  
4. MUTE: Press to MUTE playing  
media; press again to return to  
playing media  
5. EJ: Press to eject a CD. Press EJ  
and a memory preset to eject a  
specific disc. Press and hold to eject  
all loaded discs.  
6. Bass: Press BASS; then press  
SEL  
/
to decrease/increase  
the bass output.  
Treble: Press TREB; then press  
SEL  
/
to decrease/increase  
the treble output.  
7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble,  
Balance, Fade and other menu  
functions.  
8. Balance: Press BAL; then press  
SEL  
/
to shift sound to the  
left/right speakers.  
Fade: Press FADE; then press  
SEL  
/
to shift sound to the  
rear/front speakers.  
9. Menu: Press to access the  
following functions:  
Compression: Brings soft and loud  
CD passages together for a more  
consistent listening level when in CD mode. Press MENU until  
compression status is displayed. Press the SEL control to enable the  
compression feature when COMPRESS OFF is displayed. Press the SEL  
control again to disable the feature when COMPRESS ON is displayed.  
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT  
MINUTE is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase (  
) or decrease  
(
) the hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.  
34  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
Folder/Track Mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU until MODE appears in  
the display. Use SEL to toggle between FOLDER (only tracks within  
selected folder are accessible) or TRACK (all tracks on disc are  
accessible) MODE.  
10. REPEAT: Press to repeat the  
current CD/MP3 track. Press again  
to disable.  
11. SHUFFLE: Press play the  
CD/MP3 tracks on the current disc  
in random order. Press again to  
disable.  
12. FOLDER  
: Press to access  
the next MP3 directory.  
13. FOLDER  
: Press to access  
the previous MP3 directory  
14. FF(Fast forward): In CD/MP3  
mode, press until desired selection  
is reached.  
15. REW(Rewind): In CD/MP3  
mode, press until desired selection  
is reached.  
16. SAT (if equipped): Your radio  
comes equipped with Satellite Ready  
capability. The kit to enable the  
Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed satellite  
instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Dealer installed  
satellite kit only available in the continental United States.  
17. BAND: Press to toggle between  
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.  
18. Memory presets: To set a  
station: Select frequency, tune to a  
station, press and hold a preset  
button until sound returns.  
35  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
19. Power/volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF; turn to increase or  
decrease volume levels.  
20. Load: Press to load a CD. Press  
LOAD and a memory preset to load  
to a specific disc slot. Press and  
hold to load up to six discs.  
21. CD: Press to enter CD mode.  
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12  
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,  
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not  
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular  
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs  
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted  
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to  
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be  
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive  
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your  
dealer for further information.  
22. Scan: Press SCAN to hear a  
brief sampling of radio stations or  
CD/MP3 tracks. Press again to stop.  
23. Disc/Tune: Press  
or  
to  
manually tune down/up the radio frequency band, or to listen to the  
previous/next CD.  
CAT: CAT is only available when equipped with Satellite Radio. Your  
Audiophile radio comes equipped with Satellite ready capability. The kit  
to enable Satellite reception is available through your dealer. Detailed  
Satellite instructions are included with the dealer installed kit. Dealer  
installed satellite kit only available in the continental United States.  
For information regarding SIRIUS Satellite Radio, please call toll-free  
888-539-SIRIUS (888-539-7474) or visit the SIRIUS website at  
www.siriusradio.com  
24. CD slot: Insert a CD, label side up.  
36  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
RADIO FREQUENCIES  
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications  
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:  
AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz  
FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz  
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS  
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:  
Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the  
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.  
Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,  
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.  
Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal  
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency  
is displayed.  
CASSETTE/PLAYER CARE  
Do:  
Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.  
Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole  
and turning the hub.  
Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.  
Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity or  
cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing.  
Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after  
10–12 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation.  
Don’t:  
Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold.  
Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being  
played.  
37  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entertainment Systems  
CD/CD PLAYER CARE  
Do:  
Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.  
Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner  
and wipe from the center out.  
Don’t:  
Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods  
of time.  
Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.  
Clean using a circular motion.  
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12  
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,  
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not  
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular  
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs  
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted  
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to  
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be  
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive  
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your  
dealer for further information.  
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE  
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If  
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.  
38  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
Climate Controls  
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM  
(IF EQUIPPED)  
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls  
the volume of air circulated in the  
vehicle.  
2. Temperature selection:  
Controls the temperature of the  
airflow in the vehicle.  
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the  
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.  
VENT: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.  
FLR: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.  
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.  
MIX: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and  
the floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.  
Operating tips  
To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place  
the air flow selector in the  
position.  
To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm  
weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.  
Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air  
flow to the back seats.  
Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of  
the windshield.  
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:  
1. Select MIX.  
2. Set the temperature control to maintain comfort.  
3. Set the fan speed to HI.  
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these  
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.  
39  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM  
(IF EQUIPPED)  
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls  
the volume of air circulated in the  
vehicle.  
2. Temperature selection:  
Controls the temperature of the  
airflow in the vehicle.  
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the  
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.  
MAX A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the  
instrument panel vents only.  
NORM A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the  
instrument panel vents only.  
VENT: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.  
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.  
FLR: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.  
MIX: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and  
floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.  
Operating tips  
To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place  
the air flow selector in the  
position.  
To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the  
air flow selector in the OFF position.  
Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the  
airflow to the back seats.  
Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of  
the windshield.  
40  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate Controls  
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:  
1. Select MIX.  
2. Set the temperature control to maintain comfort.  
3. Set the fan speed to HI.  
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these  
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.  
REAR FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT (IF EQUIPPED)  
The rear fan controls adjust the  
volume of air circulated in the rear  
of the vehicle.  
41  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Lights  
HEADLAMP CONTROL  
The first position turns on the  
parking, tail, license plate and  
side marker lamps.  
The outer position turns on the  
headlamps.  
Battery saver  
The battery saver will turn off the courtesy lamps in 10 minutes if a door  
is left open and the key is not in the ignition. The battery saver will also  
shut off the demand interior lamps 30 minutes after the ignition control  
has been turned off and key removed.  
The battery saver can be programmed to turn all the interior lamps off  
after two minutes. - Have all doors closed before starting the procedure:  
1. Put key into the RUN position (Do not start the vehicle).  
2. After the odometer is displayed, press and release the rest button 10  
times. (Step 2 must be completed in 60 seconds)  
3. The words ’Battery Saver’ will be displayed.  
4. Press the reset button to select/toggle between ’2 minutes’ or ’30  
minutes’ duration.  
5. Once your time choice is displayed, wait until the odometer is  
displayed (approximately 30 seconds).  
6. The battery saver feature will now work with the new time duration.  
Note: The vehicle comes from the factory set at 2 minutes. The vehicle  
will automatically change to 30 minutes, regardless of its current  
duration, once the odometer reads over 50 miles.  
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)  
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.  
To activate:  
the ignition must be in the ON position,  
the headlamp control is in the OFF or parking lamp position and  
the parking brake must be disengaged.  
42  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during  
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system  
does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide  
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your  
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.  
High beams  
Push the lever toward the  
instrument panel to activate. Pull  
the lever towards you to deactivate.  
Flash to pass  
Pull toward you slightly to activate  
and release to deactivate.  
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL  
To adjust the brightness of the  
instrument panel, rotate the dimmer  
control clockwise/counterclockwise  
when the headlamp control is in the  
parking lamp or low-beam position.  
To turn on the interior lamps, rotate  
the dimmer control fully  
counterclockwise.  
The dome lamp will not illuminate if the control switch is in the OFF  
position.  
43  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
HEADLAMP AIM ADJUSTMENT  
The headlamps are designed to be mechanically aimed, but can also be  
aimed visually by doing the following:  
1. Park your vehicle on a level  
surface about 25 feet (7.6 meters)  
away from a vertical plain surface  
(3). Check your headlamp alignment  
at night or in a dark area so that  
you can see the headlamp beam  
pattern.  
(1) Eight feet  
(2) Center height of lamp to  
ground  
(3) Twenty-five feet  
(4) Horizontal reference line  
(5) Center of headlamps  
(6) Center line of the vehicle  
2. The center of the headlamp is marked either on the lens (a circle or  
cross marker) or on the bulb shield, internal to the lamp (mark or  
feature). Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the  
ground (2) and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long horizontal line on the  
wall or screen (1) at this height (masking tape works well).  
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps  
and open the hood.  
4. Locate the high intensity area of  
the beam pattern and place the top  
edge of the intensity zone even with  
the horizontal reference line (4). If  
the top edge of the high intensity  
area is not even with the horizontal  
line, follow the next step to adjust  
it.  
44  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
5.  
Aerodynamic: Locate the  
vertical adjuster (2) for each  
headlamp. Adjust the aim by  
turning the adjuster control either  
clockwise (to adjust up) or  
counterclockwise (to adjust  
down).  
Sealed beam: Locate the vertical  
adjuster (1) for each headlamp.  
Adjust the aim by turning the  
adjuster control either clockwise  
(to adjust up) or  
counterclockwise (to adjust  
down).  
6. In addition to the horizontal line  
marked in step 2, a pair of vertical  
lines (5) must be marked at the  
center line of the headlamps on the  
wall or screen.  
7. On the wall or screen, locate the high intensity area of the beam  
pattern. The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with the  
vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment. If the left  
edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical line, follow  
the next step to adjust it.  
8.  
Aerodynamic: Locate the horizontal adjuster (1) for each headlamp.  
Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise, to place the left edge of the  
high intensity area even with the vertical line corresponding to the  
headlamp under adjustment.  
Sealed beam: Locate the horizontal adjuster (2) for each headlamp.  
Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise, to place the left edge of the  
high intensity area even with the vertical line corresponding to the  
headlamp under adjustment.  
45  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL  
Push down to activate the left  
turn signal.  
Push up to activate the right turn  
signal.  
INTERIOR LAMPS  
Cargo and dome lamps with rear headliner  
Rear cargo lamps equipped with an  
ON/OFF/DOOR control will light  
when:  
doors are closed and the control  
is in the ON position  
control is in the DOOR position  
and any door is open  
headlamp control is rotated fully counterclockwise  
When the control is in the OFF position, it will not illuminate when you  
open the doors or fully rotate the headlamp control.  
Third row courtesy/reading/cargo lamps  
The dome portion of the lamp, the  
center light, can be turned on when  
the headlamp control is rotated fully  
counterclockwise or when any door  
is opened.  
With the ignition key in the ACC or ON position, the rear dome lamp can  
be turned ON or OFF by sliding the control.  
46  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Front and rear courtesy/reading  
lamps  
The dome portion of the lamp, the  
center light, can be turned on when  
the headlamp control is rotated fully  
counterclockwise or when any door  
is opened.  
The reading lamp portion, the two outer lights, can only be toggled on  
and off at the lamp.  
BULBS  
Replacing exterior bulbs  
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.  
Using the right bulbs  
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs  
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an  
“E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern  
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly  
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn  
time.  
Function  
Number  
Trade number  
of bulbs  
Headlamps (sealed beam)  
Headlamps (aerodynamic)  
Park lamp and turn signal (front)  
Back-up lamps  
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
H5054  
9007  
4157K or 3157K  
3156K or 3156  
168  
License plate lamp  
Stop/tail/turn/side marker lamp  
High-mount brakelamp  
Cargo lamp  
Dome lamp (standard)  
Map/reading lamp  
3457K or 3357K  
912  
211-2  
912  
211-2  
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.  
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer  
47  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Replacing headlamp bulbs (aerodynamic)  
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the OFF position and open the hood.  
2. Push each clip tab toward the  
engine compartment and lift upward  
to the stop position, then remove  
the headlamp assembly.  
3. Disconnect the electrical  
connector from the bulb by pulling  
rearward.  
4. Remove the bulb retaining ring by  
rotating it counterclockwise, and  
slide the ring off the plastic base.  
5. Pull the bulb straight out.  
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of  
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do  
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to  
break the next time the headlamps are operated.  
NOTE: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with  
alcohol before being used.  
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.  
48  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Replacing headlamp bulbs (sealed beam)  
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in the OFF position and open the hood.  
2. Remove the two headlamp screws  
and bezel from the headlamp  
housing.  
3. Remove the four headlamp bulb  
retaining screws and the retaining  
ring.  
4. Remove the headlamp.  
5. Disconnect the electrical  
connector from the bulb and remove  
the bulb.  
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.  
Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs  
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position.  
2. Remove two screws and pull lamp assembly away from the vehicle.  
3. Rotate the bulb socket  
counterclockwise and remove.  
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight  
out of the socket.  
To complete installation, follow the  
removal procedures in reverse order.  
49  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs  
The interior cargo lamp (if equipped), on vehicles without a rear  
headliner, will have to be removed from under the high-mount brakelamp  
assembly located inside the vehicle. Then:  
1. Remove the two screws from the  
high-mount brakelamp assembly and  
lift the lamp from the vehicle.  
2. Remove the bulb socket from the  
lamp assembly by turning  
counterclockwise.  
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight  
out of the socket.  
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedure in reverse order.  
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs  
1. Turn the headlamp switch to OFF  
and then remove the two screws  
and the license plate lamp assembly  
from the rear door.  
2. Remove bulb socket from lamp  
assembly by turning  
counterclockwise.  
3. Pull the bulb out from socket and  
push in the new bulb.  
To install the new bulb, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.  
50  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lights  
Replacing tail lamp/turn/backup lamp bulbs  
1. Turn the headlamp switch to the  
OFF position and then remove the  
four screws and the lamp assembly  
from vehicle.  
2. Rotate bulb socket  
counterclockwise and remove from  
lamp assembly.  
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight  
out of the socket and push in the  
new bulb.  
To install the lamp, follow the removal procedures in reverse order.  
51  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Driver Controls  
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER  
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end  
of the control away from you to  
increase the speed of the wipers;  
rotate towards you to decrease the  
speed of the wipers.  
Windshield washer: Push the end  
of the stalk:  
briefly: causes a single swipe of  
the wipers without washer fluid.  
a quick push and hold: the wipers  
will swipe three times with  
washer fluid.  
a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for  
up to ten seconds.  
Changing the wiper blades  
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the  
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle  
from the wiper arm. Push the lock  
pin manually to release the blade  
and pull the wiper blade down  
toward the windshield to remove it  
from the arm.  
2. Attach the new wiper to the  
wiper arm and press it into place  
until a click is heard.  
3. Replace wiper blades every 6 months for optimum performance.  
4. Poor wiper quality can sometimes be improved by cleaning the wiper  
blades, refer to Window and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter.  
5. To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to  
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The  
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the  
wiper rubber element.  
52  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
TILT STEERING WHEEL  
To adjust the steering wheel:  
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel  
release control toward you.  
2. Move the steering wheel up or  
down until you find the desired  
location.  
3. Release the steering wheel  
release control. This will lock the  
steering wheel in position.  
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.  
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)  
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to  
your option package.  
Storage compartment (if equipped)  
Press the release on the door to  
open the storage compartment.  
The storage compartment may be  
used to secure sunglasses or a  
similar object.  
53  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Installing a garage door opener (if equipped)  
The storage compartment can be converted to accommodate a variety of  
aftermarket garage door openers:  
1. Place Velcro hook onto side of  
aftermarket transmitter opposite of  
actuator control.  
2. Place the transmitter into storage  
compartment, control down.  
3. Place the provided height  
adaptors onto the back of the  
GARAGE control as needed.  
4. Press the GARAGE control to  
activate the transmitter.  
Electronic compass/temperature display (if equipped)  
Outside air temperature  
The outside temperature display is  
contained in the overhead console.  
The temperature display can be  
turned off and on by pressing the  
SELECT control on the overhead  
console. The temperature can be  
displayed in Centigrade or  
Fahrenheit by pressing the SELECT  
control.  
73˚ NW  
If the outside temperature falls  
below 3°C (38°F), the display will alternate from “ICE” to the outside  
temperature at a two second rate for one minute.  
54  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Compass  
The compass display is contained in the overhead console. The vehicle  
heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW.  
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large  
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic  
or metallic objects placed in or on the vehicle may also affect compass  
accuracy. Adjustments may need to be made to the zone and calibration  
of the compass.  
Compass zone adjustment  
1. Determine which magnetic zone  
you are in by referring to the zone  
map.  
3 2  
4
1
15  
2. Turn the ignition to the ON  
position.  
14  
13  
5
12  
6
7 8 91011  
3. Press and hold the SELECT  
control until VAR appears in the  
display, then release. The display  
should show the current zone  
number.  
4. Press the SELECT control until  
the desired zone number appears.  
The display will flash and then  
return to normal operation. The zone is now updated.  
Compass calibration adjustment  
Perform this adjustment in an open  
area free from steel structures and  
high voltage lines:  
Press and hold the SELECT  
control until CAL appears in the  
display (approximately eight  
seconds) and release.  
55  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Drive the vehicle slowly (less than 5 km/h [3 mph]) in circles until  
CAL indicator turns off in about 2–3 complete circles.  
The compass is now calibrated.  
CELL PHONE USE  
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly  
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,  
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using  
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety  
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency  
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications  
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.  
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular  
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in vehicle communications  
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.  
A driver’s first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.  
The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to  
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to  
operate Mobile Communications Equipment.  
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)  
Power outlets are designed for  
accessory plugs only. Do not  
hang any type of accessory or  
accessory bracket from the plug.  
Improper use of the power  
outlet can cause damage not  
covered by your warranty.  
The auxiliary power point is located  
on the instrument panel.  
A second power point (if equipped)  
is located behind the driver’s seat on the upper trim panel.  
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter. Use  
the power point.  
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element.  
The maximum power each power point can supply depends on the fuse  
rating. For example: a 20A fuse should supply a maximum of 240 Watts,  
a 15A fuse should supply a maximum of 180 Watts and a 10A fuse should  
supply a maximum of 120 Watts. Exceeding these limits will result in a  
blown fuse.  
56  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.  
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)  
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let  
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure  
themselves.  
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free  
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in  
the proximity of the window openings.  
Press and hold the bottom part of  
the rocker switch to open the  
window. Press and hold the top part  
of the rocker switch to close the  
window.  
ACCESSORY DELAY  
With accessory delay, after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF  
position, the window switches and radio may be used for up to ten  
minutes or until any door is opened.  
POWER SIDE VIEW MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)  
To adjust your mirrors:  
1. Select  
mirror or  
mirror.  
to adjust the left  
to adjust the right  
2. Move the control in the direction  
you wish to tilt the mirror.  
3. Return to the center position to  
disable the adjust function.  
Spotter mirror  
Note: New spotter mirrors may be stiff, requiring several cycles before  
the spotter adjustment effort eases.  
57  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Standard mirror  
The spotter mirror only can be tilted  
from top to bottom. Move the lower  
mirror manually up/down to increase  
side and rear visibility. Apply  
pressure only in the center of the  
spotter mirror along the top or  
bottom edges to adjust the tilt  
feature. Do not apply any force on the left or right edges of the  
standard mirror spotter section, as this may lead to a mirror  
fracture.  
Telescoping mirror  
The spotter mirror has a swivel that  
allows it to tilt up and down, and  
also to tilt left and right to increase  
side and rear visibility.  
Fold-away mirrors  
The mirrors can be manually folded forward or backwards for narrow  
spaces like driving through an automatic car wash or backing out of a  
garage with the trailer tow mirror.  
58  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
The telescoping feature (if  
equipped) allows the mirror to  
extend approximately 3.15 inches  
(80 mm). This feature is especially  
useful to the driver when towing a  
trailer.  
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)  
With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)  
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed  
control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).  
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that  
are winding, slippery or unpaved.  
Setting speed control  
The controls for using your speed  
control are located on the steering  
wheel for your convenience.  
1. Press the ON control and release  
it.  
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.  
3. Press the SET ACCEL control  
and release it.  
4. Take your foot off the accelerator  
pedal.  
Note:  
COAST  
Vehicle speed may vary  
momentarily when driving up and  
down a steep hill.  
If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you  
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.  
If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below  
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.  
59  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Resuming a set speed  
Press the RES (resume) control and  
release it. This will automatically  
return the vehicle to the previously  
set speed. The RES control will not  
work if the vehicle speed is not  
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h).  
COAST  
Increasing speed while using speed control  
There are two ways to set a higher  
speed:  
Press and hold the SET ACCEL  
control until you get to the  
desired speed, then release the  
control. You can also use the SET  
ACCEL control to operate the  
Tap-Up function. Press and  
COAST  
release this control to increase the vehicle set speed in increments by  
1 mph (1.6 km/h).  
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the  
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET ACCEL control.  
Reducing speed while using speed control  
There are two ways to reduce a set  
speed:  
Press and hold the COAST  
control until you get to the  
desired speed, then release the  
COAST  
control. You can also use the  
COAST control to operate the  
Tap-Down function. Press and  
release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in increments by  
1 mph (1.6 km/h).  
60  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driver Controls  
Depress the brake pedal until the  
desired vehicle speed is reached,  
press the SET ACCEL control.  
COAST  
Turning off speed control  
There are two ways to turn off the  
speed control:  
Depress the brake pedal. This will  
not erase your vehicle’s  
previously set speed.  
Press the speed control OFF  
control.  
Note: When you turn off the speed control or the ignition, your speed  
control set speed memory is erased.  
61  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
Locks and Security  
KEYS  
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. You should always carry a  
second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an  
emergency.  
Your keys are programmed to your vehicle; using a non-programmed key  
will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your dealer supplied  
keys, replacement keys are available through your authorized dealer.  
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)  
Press U to unlock all doors and L to  
lock all doors.  
U
L
Memory lock  
If you lock your doors with the power lock switch or the remote  
transmitter while the sliding door is open, the door will automatically  
lock after it is closed.  
Back cargo door lock (if equipped)  
The passenger side rear cargo door  
has a power door lock control  
mounted on the inside of the door.  
When this lock is pressed, all doors  
will lock/unlock.  
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of  
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device  
must accept any interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
62  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is  
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could  
be caused by:  
weather conditions,  
nearby radio towers,  
structures around the vehicle, or  
other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.  
The remote entry system allows you  
to lock or unlock all vehicle doors  
without a key. Note:  
The lock and unlock features  
work when the ignition is in any  
position.  
The panic feature is active when  
the ignition is in either the 1  
(ACCESSORY), 2 (LOCK) or 3  
(OFF) positions.  
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take  
ALL remote entry transmitters with you to the dealership in order to  
aid in troubleshooting the problem.  
Unlocking the doors  
1. Press  
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior  
lamps will illuminate.  
2. Press  
doors.  
and release again within three seconds to unlock all the  
Locking the doors  
1. Press  
and release to lock all the doors.  
2. Press  
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the  
doors are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again, and the  
horn will chirp once. If any vehicle door is open or ajar, the horn will  
chirp twice.  
63  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
Sounding a panic alarm  
Press  
to activate the alarm. Press the control again, or turn the  
ignition to the 1 (ACCESSORY) or 4 (ON) position to deactivate the  
alarm.  
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 2  
(LOCK) or 3 (OFF) position.  
Replacing the battery  
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium  
battery CR2032 or equivalent.  
To replace the battery:  
1. Twist a thin coin between the two  
halves of the remote entry  
transmitter near the key ring. DO  
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER  
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE  
FRONT HOUSING OF THE  
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.  
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the  
battery terminals on the back  
surface of the circuit board.  
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when  
disposing of transmitter batteries.  
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry  
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery  
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing  
cavity.  
5. Snap the two halves back together.  
64  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter  
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter  
should operate normally after battery replacement.  
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters  
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed  
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry  
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all  
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for  
reprogramming.  
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters  
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)  
available before beginning this procedure. If all remote entry transmitters  
are not present during programming procedure, the ones missing during  
programming will no longer operate the vehicle.  
To reprogram the remote entry  
4
transmitters:  
3
1. Place the key in the ignition and  
5
turn from the (2) LOCK position to  
(3) OFF.  
2
2. Cycle eight times rapidly (within  
10 seconds) between the (3) OFF  
position and (4) ON. Note: The  
eighth turn must end in the (4) ON  
position.  
1
3. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming  
mode has been activated.  
4. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.  
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the  
procedure over again.  
5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry  
transmitter has been programmed.  
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to program each additional remote entry  
transmitter (up to four transmitters).  
7. Turn the ignition to the (3) OFF position after you have finished  
programming all of the remote entry transmitters.  
8. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming  
mode has been exited.  
65  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locks and Security  
Illuminated entry  
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to  
unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.  
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:  
the ignition switch is turned to the 4 (ON) or 1 (ACCESSORY)  
position, or  
the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or  
after 25 seconds of illumination.  
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position  
for the illuminated entry system to operate.  
The inside lights will not turn off if:  
they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or  
any door is open.  
66  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
SEATING  
Notes:  
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the  
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the  
event of a collision.  
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of  
injury in a collision or sudden stop.  
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)  
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is  
moving.  
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap  
belt snug and low across the hips.  
Lift handle to move seat forward or  
backward.  
67  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Pull lever up to adjust seatback.  
Using the manual lumbar support  
The lumbar support control is  
located on the inboard side of the  
driver’s seat.  
Turn the lumbar support control  
clockwise to increase firmness.  
Turn the lumbar support control  
counterclockwise to increase  
softness.  
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)  
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.  
Press to raise or lower the front  
portion of the seat cushion.  
68  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Press to raise or lower the rear  
portion of the seat cushion.  
Press the control to move the seat  
forward, backward, up or down.  
Quick release captains chair (7 passenger configuration second  
row only)  
To remove the seat:  
1. Disengage the lap/shoulder belt  
from the seat by inserting a key or  
small screwdriver into the slot in the  
detachable anchor and lifting  
upward.  
69  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Stow the tongue end of the  
detachable anchor.  
2. Pull the seat latch handle, then  
pull the seat toward the right side of  
the vehicle to disengage four pins  
from the floor mount.  
3. Remove the seat.  
To install the seat:  
Check to see that the seat and seatback is latched securely in  
position. Keep floor area free of objects that would prevent  
proper seat engagement. Never attempt to adjust the seat while the  
vehicle is in motion.  
1. Position the seat to the floor  
mount.  
2. Pull the seat latch handle downward to lock the seat in position.  
3. Make sure the safety belt is not twisted, then insert the seat belt  
tongue into detachable anchor until you hear a “click” and feel the latch  
engage.  
70  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
REAR SEATS  
Accessing the 3rd, 4th and 5th row seats (if equipped)  
To make access to the 4th and 5th  
row seats easier, attach the 3rd and  
4th row passenger side seat belts to  
the trim panel by using the snaps  
attached to the seat belt webbing  
and the trim panel.  
Rear bench seat  
To remove the seats:  
1. Disengage the lap/shoulder belt  
from the seat by inserting a key or  
small screwdriver into the slot in the  
detachable anchor and lifting  
upward (2nd row passenger side  
only).  
Stow the tongue end of the  
detachable anchor (2nd row only).  
71  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
2. Pull the LH/RH seat latch  
handles, located under the seat,  
rearward to release the latch hook  
ends from the front strikers.  
3. Move the seat rearward and lift the seats rear hooks away from the  
rear strikers prior to lifting the front hooks out from the front strikers.  
4. With assistance, remove the seat assembly.  
To remove the 3rd, 4th, and 5th row seats (if equipped), repeat steps  
2 through 4.  
To install the seat:  
1. Position the seat in the vehicle.  
2. Align front hooks to front strikers, prior to lowering the rear hooks  
and aligning them with the rear strikers.  
3. Engage the LH/RH latch rod hook ends in the front striker locking  
holes.  
4. Rotate the LH/RH latch handles forward, and at the same time slide  
the seat assembly forward to engage the strikers. Continue forward  
movement until the seat reaches the end of its travel.  
5. Make sure the safety belt is not twisted, then insert the seat belt  
tongue into detachable anchor until you hear a “click” and feel the latch  
engage (2nd row only).  
Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is  
occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury  
during a sudden stop.  
72  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
SAFETY RESTRAINTS  
Safety restraints precautions  
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap  
belt snug and low across the hips.  
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit in the back  
seat where they can be properly restrained.  
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the  
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from  
injury in a collision.  
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always  
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag  
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.  
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or  
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas  
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to  
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and  
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a  
safety belt properly.  
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely  
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.  
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt  
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that  
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the  
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)  
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.  
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.  
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back  
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.  
73  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been  
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check  
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.  
Combination lap and shoulder belts  
1. Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle (the buckle closest to  
the direction the tongue is coming  
from) until you hear a snap and feel  
it latch. Make sure the tongue is  
securely fastened in the buckle.  
2. To unfasten, push the release  
button and remove the tongue from  
the buckle.  
The front outboard and rear outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are  
combination lap and shoulder belts. The front outboard passenger and  
rear seat outboard safety belts have two types of locking modes  
described below:  
Vehicle sensitive mode  
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length  
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle  
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner  
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph (8  
km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce  
forward movement of the driver and passengers.  
74  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Automatic locking mode  
When to use the automatic locking mode  
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will  
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic  
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.  
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed in a  
passenger front or outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children  
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat  
whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety  
seats for children later in this chapter.  
How to use the automatic locking mode  
Buckle the combination lap and  
shoulder belt.  
Grasp the shoulder portion and  
pull downward until the entire  
belt is pulled out.  
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking  
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking  
mode.  
75  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
How to disengage the automatic locking mode  
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract  
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the  
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.  
After any vehicle collision, the safety belt systems at all outboard  
seating positions (except the driver position, which does not  
have this feature) must be checked by a qualified technician to verify  
that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still  
functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for  
proper function.  
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if  
the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or  
any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked  
according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. Failure to replace  
the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in  
collisions.  
Safety belt pretensioner  
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and  
front outboard passenger seating positions.  
The safety belt pretensioner is a device which removes excess webbing  
from the safety belt system. The safety belt pretensioner uses the same  
crash sensor system as the front air bag supplemental restraint system  
(SRS). When the safety belt pretensioner deploys, webbing from the lap  
and shoulder belt is tightened. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance  
section in this chapter.  
The driver and front passenger seat belt system (including  
retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the  
vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front air  
bags and safety belt pretensioners.  
76  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Front safety belt height adjustment  
The driver and front seat outboard  
positions are equipped with a height  
adjuster. Adjust the height of the  
shoulder belt so the belt rests  
across the middle of your shoulder.  
To adjust the shoulder belt height,  
push the button and slide the height  
adjuster up or down. Release the  
button and pull down on the height  
adjuster to make sure it is locked in  
place.  
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests  
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety  
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and  
increase the risk of injury in a collision.  
Lap belts  
Adjusting the center lap belt  
The lap belt does not adjust automatically.  
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the  
hips, not across the waist.  
Insert the tongue into the correct  
buckle (the buckle closest to the  
direction the tongue is coming  
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the  
tongue at a right angle to the belt  
and pull across your lap until it  
reaches the buckle. To tighten the  
belt, pull the loose end of the belt  
through the tongue until it fits snugly across the hips.  
77  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Shorten and fasten the belt when  
not in use.  
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime  
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a  
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.  
Conditions of operation  
If...  
Then...  
The driver’s safety belt is not  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON  
position...  
The safety belt warning light  
illuminates and the warning chime  
sounds 4-8 seconds.  
The driver’s safety belt is  
buckled while the indicator  
light is illuminated and the  
warning chime is sounding...  
The driver’s safety belt is  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON  
position...  
The safety belt warning light and  
warning chime turn off.  
The indicator chime will remain off  
and the safety belt warning lamp will  
illuminate for 4-8 seconds.  
BeltMinder  
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt  
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the  
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently  
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the  
instrument cluster.  
78  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
If...  
Then...  
The driver’s safety belt is not  
buckled approximately 5  
seconds after the safety belt  
warning light has turned off...  
The BeltMinder feature is activated -  
the safety belt warning light  
illuminates and the warning chime  
sounds for 6 seconds every 30  
seconds, repeating for approximately  
5 minutes or until safety belt is  
buckled.  
The driver’s safety belt is  
buckled while the safety belt  
indicator light is illuminated  
and the safety belt warning  
chime is sounding...  
The BeltMinder feature will not  
activate.  
The driver’s safety belt is  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON  
position...  
The BeltMinder feature will not  
activate.  
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:  
(All statistics based on U.S. data)  
Reasons given...  
Consider...  
“Crashes are rare events”  
36700 crashes occur every day. The  
more we drive, the more we are  
exposed to “rare” events, even for  
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be  
seriously injured in a crash during  
our lifetime.  
“I’m not going far”  
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25  
miles of home.  
“Belts are uncomfortable”  
We design our safety belts to enhance  
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -  
try different positions for the safety  
belt upper anchorage and seatback  
which should be as upright as  
possible; this can improve comfort.  
79  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Reasons given...  
Consider...  
“I was in a hurry”  
Prime time for an accident.  
BeltMinder reminds us to take a few  
seconds to buckle up.  
“Seat belts don’t work”  
Safety belts, when used properly,  
reduce risk of death to front seat  
occupants by 45% in cars, and by  
60% in light trucks.  
“Traffic is light”  
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in  
single-vehicle crashes, many when  
no other vehicles are around.  
Possibly, but a serious crash can do  
much more than wrinkle your clothes,  
particularly if you are unbelted.  
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4  
times more often in vehicles with  
TWO or MORE people. Children and  
younger brothers/sisters imitate  
behavior they see.  
“Belts wrinkle my clothes”  
“The people I’m with don’t  
wear belts”  
“I have an air bag”  
Air bags offer greater protection when  
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags  
are not designed to inflate in rear and  
side crashes or rollovers.  
“I’d rather be thrown clear”  
People who are ejected are 40  
times more likely to DIE. Safety  
belts help prevent ejection, WE CAN’T  
“PICK OUR CRASH”.  
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt  
Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of  
injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt  
Minder feature please follow the directions stated below.  
One time disable  
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an  
ignition ON cycle, the BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle  
only.  
80  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature  
Read steps 1 - 5 thoroughly before proceeding with the  
deactivation/activation programming procedure.  
The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the  
following procedure:  
Before following the procedure, make sure that:  
the parking brake is set  
the gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)  
the ignition switch is in the OFF position  
all vehicle doors are closed  
the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled  
the parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position  
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt  
Minder feature while driving the vehicle.  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT  
START THE ENGINE.)  
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1  
minute)  
Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt  
warning light turns off.  
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 9 times, ending with the safety  
belt in the unbuckled state.  
After step 3 is complete, the airbag warning light will be turned on for  
3 seconds.  
Beltminder will automatically exit programming mode without  
changing its enable status if step 4 does not occur within 10 seconds  
of the end of step 3.  
4. Within 10 seconds of the light turning on, buckle then unbuckle the  
safety belt.  
This will disable the BeltMinder feature for that seating position if it is  
currently enabled. As confirmation, the airbag warning light will flash  
4 times per second for 3 seconds.  
81  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
This will enable the BeltMinder feature for that seating position if it is  
currently disabled. As confirmation, the restraint system warning light  
will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3 seconds with  
the light off, then followed by the airbag warning light flashing 4 times  
per second for 3 seconds again.  
5. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is  
complete.  
Safety belt extension assembly  
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 8 inch (20  
cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number  
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.  
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety  
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on  
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too  
short for you when fully extended.  
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt  
across the torso.  
Safety belt maintenance  
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work  
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure  
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt  
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle  
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder  
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if  
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching  
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company  
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in  
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a  
qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and  
continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety  
belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and  
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.  
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt  
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe  
personal injuries in the event of a collision.  
Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.  
82  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)  
Important SRS precautions  
The SRS is designed to work with  
the safety belt to help protect the  
driver and right front passenger  
from certain upper body injuries. Air  
bags DO NOT inflate slowly; there is  
a risk of injury from a deploying air  
bag.  
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always  
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag  
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.  
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back  
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. Never  
place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must  
transport a forward-facing child in the front seat, move the seat all the  
way back and use appropriate restraints.  
83  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)  
recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches)  
between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module.  
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air  
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.  
To properly position yourself away from the air bag:  
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the  
pedals comfortably.  
Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.  
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing  
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those  
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing  
serious injury.  
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag  
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or  
Lincoln Mercury dealer.  
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle  
(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow  
hooks) may affect the performance of the air bag system, increasing  
the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.  
Additional equipment may affect the performance of the air bag  
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body  
Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate  
installation of additional equipment.  
84  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Children and air bags  
Children must always be properly  
restrained. Accident statistics  
suggest that children are safer when  
properly restrained in the rear  
seating positions than in the front  
seating position. Failure to follow  
these instructions may increase the  
risk of injury in a collision.  
Air bags can kill or injure a  
child in a child seat.  
NEVER place a rear-facing child  
seat in front of an active air bag. If  
you must use a forward-facing  
child seat in the front seat, move  
the seat all the way back.  
How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work?  
The air bag SRS is designed to  
activate when the vehicle sustains a  
longitudinal deceleration sufficient  
to cause the air bag sensors to close  
an electrical circuit that initiates air  
bag inflation. The fact that the air  
bags did not inflate in a collision  
does not mean that something is  
wrong with the system. Rather, it  
means the forces were not sufficient  
enough to cause activation. Air bags  
are designed to inflate in frontal and  
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless  
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.  
85  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The air bags inflate and deflate  
rapidly upon activation. After air bag  
deployment, it is normal to notice a  
smoke-like, powdery residue or  
smell the burnt propellant. This may  
consist of cornstarch, talcum  
powder or sodium compounds which  
may irritate the skin and eyes, but  
none of the residue is toxic.  
While the SRS is designed to help  
reduce serious injuries, contact with  
a deploying air bag may also cause  
abrasions, swelling or temporary  
hearing loss. Because air bags must  
inflate rapidly and with considerable  
force, there is the risk of death or  
serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal  
injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are  
otherwise out of position at the time of air bag deployment. It is  
extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away  
from the air bag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.  
The SRS consists of:  
driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and  
air bags)  
one or more impact and safing sensors  
a readiness light and tone  
a diagnostic module  
and the electrical wiring which connects the components  
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the  
supplemental air bag electrical system wiring (including the impact  
sensors), the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air  
bag back up power and the air bag ignitors.  
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not  
touch them after inflation.  
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function  
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not  
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a  
collision.  
86  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Determining if the system is operational  
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to  
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section  
in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is  
not required.  
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:  
The readiness light will either  
flash or stay lit.  
The readiness light will not  
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.  
A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat  
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.  
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced  
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless  
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a  
collision.  
Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles (including  
pretensioners)  
See your local dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE  
disposed of by qualified personnel.  
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN  
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety  
restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system  
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags.  
Important child restraint precautions  
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.  
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old  
or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lb.] or less) ride in your vehicle, you  
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states  
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight  
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific  
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When  
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your  
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly  
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.  
87  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the  
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from  
injury in a collision.  
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or  
child restraint you might use.  
Ford recommends using child safety seats equipped with LATCH  
attachments, attached to LATCH anchors and tether anchors. Some child  
seat manufacturers sell LATCH accessory belts that attach child seats  
that are not equipped with LATCH attachments onto LATCH anchors.  
See Attaching safety seats with LATCH attachments for child seat  
anchors in this section for seating positions with LATCH anchors.  
If you install a forward-facing child safety seat using the vehicle safety  
belts:  
use only seats equipped with lap-shoulder belts;  
forward-facing child safety seats can be used in the center of the  
three-passenger 2nd row bench seat only if a top tether strap is used;  
Ford recommends placing forward-facing safety seats in the 2nd row  
and using top tether straps for added protection.  
For more information on top tether straps, see Attaching safety seats  
with tether straps in this section.  
Any booster seat that places the vehicle’s lap belt or shoulder belt  
around a shield above and ahead of the child’s hips should not be used in  
this vehicle.  
Because the last row of seats is not equipped with either child  
tether or LATCH anchors and is spaced closer to the row of  
seats in front, Do not use forward-facing or rear-facing child seats  
(other than belt-positioning boosters) in the last row.  
Children and safety belts  
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children  
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety  
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.  
Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that  
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.  
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can  
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or  
88  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child  
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt  
fit.  
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in  
your vehicle.  
Child booster seats  
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh  
40 pounds (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the  
lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, these children are still too  
small for lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk  
of serious injury.  
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who  
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use  
of a belt-positioning booster.  
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the  
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees  
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better  
and more comfortably for growing children.  
When children should use booster seats  
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the  
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and  
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about  
80 lb. (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).  
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these  
questions:  
Can the child sit all the way back  
against the vehicle seat back with  
knees bent comfortably at the  
edge of the seat without  
slouching?  
Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?  
Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?  
Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?  
89  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Types of booster seats  
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:  
Those that are backless.  
If your backless booster seat has a  
removable shield, remove the  
shield and use the lap/shoulder  
belt. If a seating position has a  
low seat back and no head  
restraint, a backless booster seat  
may place your child’s head (top  
of ear level) above the top of the  
seat. In this case, move the  
backless booster to another  
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.  
Those with a high back.  
If, with a backless booster seat,  
you cannot find a seating position  
that adequately supports your  
child’s head, a high back booster  
seat would be a better choice.  
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with  
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb. (18 kg).  
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of  
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,  
never up high across the stomach.  
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh  
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this  
condition.  
The importance of shoulder belts  
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s  
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should  
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster  
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children  
to ride.  
90  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the  
booster seat.  
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the  
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of  
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.  
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can  
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a  
collision.  
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN  
Child and infant or child safety seats  
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the  
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the  
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the  
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or  
collision.  
When installing a child safety seat:  
Review and follow the information  
presented in the Air Bag  
Supplemental Restraint System  
section in this chapter.  
Use the correct safety belt buckle  
for that seating position (the  
buckle closest to the direction the  
tongue is coming from).  
Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle until you hear a  
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the  
buckle.  
For the front passenger seat, keep the buckle release button pointing  
up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child  
seat and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling.  
For the front passenger seat, place seat back in upright position.  
Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic  
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating  
positions) (if equipped).  
91  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48  
pounds (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used  
for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to  
provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 pounds (36 kg)  
using an upper torso harness and a belt-positioning booster.  
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether  
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and  
tether anchors. For more information on top tether straps and anchors,  
refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. For  
more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with  
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments in this  
chapter.  
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included  
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install  
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden  
stop or collision.  
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder  
belts  
1. Position the child safety seat in a  
seat with a combination lap and  
shoulder belt.  
An air bag can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Never place a  
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must  
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the  
way back.  
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear  
seat whenever possible.  
92  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt  
and then grasp the shoulder belt  
and lap belt together.  
3. While holding the shoulder and  
lap belt portions together, route the  
tongue through the child seat  
according to the child seat  
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure  
the belt webbing is not twisted.  
4. Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle (the buckle closest to  
the direction the tongue is coming  
from) for that seating position until  
you hear a snap and feel the latch  
engage. Make sure the tongue is  
latched securely by pulling on it.  
93  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
5. To put the retractor in the  
automatic locking mode, grasp the  
shoulder portion of the belt and pull  
downward until all of the belt is  
extracted.  
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it  
is in the automatic locking mode.  
7. Pull the lap belt portion across  
the child seat toward the buckle and  
pull up on the shoulder belt while  
pushing down with your knee on the  
child seat.  
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to  
remove any slack in the belt.  
9. Before placing the child in the  
seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward  
and back to make sure the seat is  
securely held in place. To check  
this, grab the seat at the belt path  
and attempt to move it side to side  
and forward and back. There should  
be no more than one inch of  
movement for proper installation.  
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is  
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt  
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps  
two through nine.  
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.  
94  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Attaching safety seats with tether straps  
Children should be placed in the rear in an appropriate child  
safety seat that is properly secured to the vehicle.  
When using forward-facing child safety seats in vehicles with  
only two seating positions so the forward-facing child safety seat  
cannot be placed in the rear of the vehicle, move the passenger seat as  
far back from the instrument panel as possible.  
Because the last row of seats is not equipped with either child  
tether or LATCH anchors and is spaced closer to the row of  
seats in front, Do not use forward-facing or rear-facing child seats  
(other than belt-positioning boosters) in the last row.  
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a  
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must  
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the  
way back.  
Front passenger seating position  
The tether can be attached directly  
to the rear of the front seat.  
95  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
1. Position the child safety seat on  
the front right-hand passenger seat.  
2. Adjust the front right-hand  
passenger seat full forward.  
3. Route the child safety seat tether  
strap over the back of the front  
right-hand passenger seat as shown.  
4. Clip the tether strap hook to the  
seat pedestal to the location shown.  
96  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
5. Adjust the front right hand  
passenger seat to the full rearward  
position.  
6. Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safety  
belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter.  
7. Tighten the child safety seat  
tether strap according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
Second row bucket seats (Chateau Quads)  
The tether strap can be attached  
directly to the tether bracket under  
the back edge of the seat cushion.  
97  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
1. Position the child safety seat on  
the second row left hand or right  
hand bucket seat.  
2. Route the child safety tether  
strap over the back of the left hand  
or right hand second row bucket  
seat.  
3. Clip the tether strap hook to the  
seat pedestal at the location shown.  
4. Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safety  
belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter.  
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
Second, Third and Fourth row three passenger bench seats  
The tether strap can be attached  
directly to the tether bracket  
provided under the back edge of the  
seat cushion.  
1. For second row 3–Passenger bench seat, place the child safety seat on  
the left hand outboard position, the center position, or the right hand  
outboard position as desired.  
For third row or fourth row 3–Passenger bench seat, place the child  
safety seat on the center position.  
98  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
2. Route the child safety tether  
strap over the back of 3–Passenger  
bench seat.  
3. Clip the tether strap hook to the  
tether bracket mounted under rear  
rail of seat cushion frame.  
4. Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safety  
belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter.  
5. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
For additional important safety information on the proper use of seat  
belts, child seats and infant seats, please read the entire Seating and  
Safety Restraints chapter in this Owner’s Guide.  
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
Children) attachments for child seat anchors  
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments  
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.  
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the  
child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also be  
attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with  
tether straps in this chapter.  
99  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Your vehicle may be equipped with LATCH anchors for child seat  
installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol:  
Five passenger crew van  
Seven passenger wagon  
Eight passenger wagon  
Twelve passenger wagon  
100  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Fifteen passenger wagon  
represents LATCH anchors.  
represents tether strap anchors.  
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor.  
In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two  
child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or  
death.  
The lower anchors for child seat  
installation are located at the rear  
section of the seat between the  
cushion and seat back.  
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a  
child seat with LATCH attachments.  
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the  
anchors shown.  
101  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten  
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion  
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without  
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the  
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.  
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly  
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child  
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if  
the anchors hold the seat in place.  
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child  
being injured in a crash greatly increases.  
102  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS  
Utility vehicles and trucks handle  
differently than passenger cars in  
the various driving conditions that  
are encountered on streets,  
highways and off-road. Utility  
vehicles and trucks are not designed  
for cornering at speeds as high as  
passenger cars any more than  
low-slung sports cars are designed  
to perform satisfactorily under  
off-road conditions.  
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than  
other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or  
death from a rollover or other crash you must:  
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;  
Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;  
Keep tires properly inflated;  
Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and  
Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.  
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely  
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must  
wear safety belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints  
to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.  
Study your Owner’s Guide and any supplements for specific information  
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional  
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.  
103  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS  
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles  
SUV and trucks can differ from  
some other vehicles in a few  
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may  
be:  
Higher – to allow higher load  
carrying capacity and to allow it  
to travel over rough terrain  
without getting hung up or  
damaging underbody components.  
Shorter – to give it the capability  
to approach inclines and drive  
over the crest of a hill without  
getting hung up or damaging  
underbody components. All other  
things held equal, a shorter  
wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering  
inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.  
Narrower — to provide greater  
maneuverability in tight spaces,  
particularly in off-road use.  
As a result of the above dimensional  
differences, SUV’s and trucks often  
will have a higher center of gravity  
and a greater difference in center of  
gravity between the loaded and  
unloaded condition.  
These differences that make your  
vehicle so versatile also make it  
handle differently than an ordinary  
passenger car.  
104  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING  
New vehicles are fitted with tires  
that have a rating on them called  
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality  
grades can be found where  
applicable on the tire sidewall  
between tread shoulder and  
maximum section width. For  
example:  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United  
States Department of Transportation has set.  
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger  
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,  
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim  
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in  
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).  
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.  
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following  
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.  
Treadwear  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of  
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified  
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one  
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual  
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the  
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and  
differences in road characteristics and climate.  
Traction AA A B C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The  
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured  
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of  
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction  
performance.  
105  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on  
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include  
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.  
Temperature A B C  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the  
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat  
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire  
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to  
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by  
law.  
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that  
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,  
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in  
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.  
TIRES  
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they  
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.  
Glossary of tire terminology  
Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,  
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle  
can carry.  
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of  
each tire providing information about the tire brand and  
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture.  
Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.  
Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a  
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing  
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s  
load carrying capability.  
106  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a  
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].  
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase  
the tire’s load carrying capability.  
kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.  
PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.  
Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has  
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and  
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).  
Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found  
on the tire label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s  
door.  
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the  
front door.  
Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.  
Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.  
Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that  
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.  
Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly  
upon which the tire beads are seated.  
INSPECTING AND INFLATING YOUR TIRES  
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly  
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure  
without appearing flat.  
Every day before you drive, check  
your tires. If one looks lower than  
the others, use a tire gauge to check  
pressure of all tires and adjust if  
required.  
At least once a month and before  
long trips, inspect each tire and  
check the tire pressure with a tire  
gauge (including spare, if equipped).  
Inflate all tires to the inflation  
pressure recommended by Ford  
Motor Company.  
107  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Inspecting your tires  
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and  
remove stones, nails, glass or other objects that may be wedged in the  
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from  
the tire and make necessary repairs.  
Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If  
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and  
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,  
tires that are damaged should not be used because they are more likely  
to blow out or fail. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so  
inspection after off-road use is also recommended.  
Inflating your tires  
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare  
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly  
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station  
gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial  
type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge.  
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire  
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause  
uneven treadwear patterns.  
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and  
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ЉblowoutЉ,  
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.  
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,  
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may  
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control  
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not  
appear to be flat!  
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure  
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found  
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on  
the tire label or certification label which is located on the B-Pillar or the  
edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire pressure  
recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely  
affect the way your vehicle handles.  
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufactures’  
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the  
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally  
108  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure  
which can be found on either the tire label or certification label which is  
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation  
pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on  
the tire label or certification label.  
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also  
change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding  
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures  
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found  
on the tire label or certification label.  
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more  
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are  
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above  
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold  
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.  
To check the pressure in your tire(s):  
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving  
even a mile.  
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check  
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure  
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air  
pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed” or reduce air  
pressure when tires are hot.  
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire  
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure with the tire gauge..  
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure  
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in  
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.  
4. Replace the valve cap.  
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.  
Note: Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other  
tires. Check the tire label on the B pillar or the edge of the driver’s door  
for the recommended spare tire pressure.  
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other  
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air  
leak.  
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.  
109  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Tire inflation information  
All tires with Steel Carcass Plies (if equipped):  
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls. As such, they  
cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including  
adjusting tire pressure, must be performed by personnel trained,  
supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and  
Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. For example, during any  
procedure involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must  
utilize a remote inflation device, and ensure that all persons are clear of  
the trajectory area.  
WARNING An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if  
improperly used, serviced or maintained. To reduce the risk of  
serious injury, never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat  
or seriously under-inflated without first removing the tire from the  
wheel assembly for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or  
replace tires or wheels without first taking precautions to protect  
persons and property.  
TIRE REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS  
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and  
handling capability.  
110  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size  
and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus  
all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or  
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and  
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of  
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.  
Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause  
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If  
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford  
or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.  
Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,  
tread design, brand, load-carrying capacity and speed rating because it  
can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result  
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal  
injury and death.  
You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires  
due to the aging of the spare tire.  
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE  
If you get a flat tire while driving:  
do not brake heavily.  
gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.  
hold the steering wheel firmly.  
slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.  
The use of tire sealants may damage your tires.  
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information (if equipped)  
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased  
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.  
111  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A  
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is  
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If  
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for temporary  
use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as  
soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size and type as  
the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the  
dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather  
than repaired.  
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:  
Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)  
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time  
Use commercial car washing equipment  
Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare  
tire/wheel  
The usage of a dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to impairment of the  
following:  
Handling, stability and braking performance  
Comfort and noise  
Ground clearance and parking at curbs  
Winter weather driving capability  
Wet weather driving capability  
All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)  
Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)  
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional caution  
should be given to:  
Towing a trailer  
Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body  
Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack  
Drive cautiously when using a dissimilar spare tire/wheel and seek  
service as soon as possible.  
Spare tire information  
The spare tire for your vehicle is stowed under the rear of your vehicle  
(except cutaway and stripped chassis models).  
112  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
To remove the spare tire:  
1. Open the rear doors and remove  
the thumb screw and anti-theft  
bracket. If finger pressure will not  
remove the thumb screw, use the  
lug wrench to loosen the screw.  
2. Remove the access plug under  
the left door.  
3. Remove the jack handle from the  
right side compartment and insert  
the tip of the jack handle through  
the access hole and into the tube.  
4. Turn the jack handle  
counterclockwise until the cable is  
slack and the tire can be slid from  
under the vehicle.  
5. Remove the retainer from the  
spare tire.  
To stow the cable retainer with the spare removed, turn the jack handle  
clockwise until all slack is removed.  
Tire change procedure  
Preparing to change the tire  
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,  
be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions)  
the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the  
vehicle) to the tire being changed.  
1. Park on a level surface.  
2. Activate the warning flashers.  
3. Place the gearshift in P (Park).  
113  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
4. Apply the parking brake and turn  
the engine off.  
5. Block the wheel that is diagonally  
opposite the tire you are changing.  
On E-450 vehicles, the parking  
brake is on the transmission.  
Therefore, the vehicle will not be  
prevented from moving when a rear  
wheel is lifted, even if the parking brake is applied. Be sure to block both  
directions of the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that is  
being lifted.  
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be  
seriously injured.  
6. Remove the spare tire and jack from the storage location.  
114  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
the jack is located in the rear  
right-hand side of the cargo area.  
7. Use the tapered end of the lug nut wrench to unscrew wheel  
ornaments attached by retaining screws. Remove any wheel trim. Insert  
the tapered end of the lug nut wrench behind wheel covers or hubcaps  
and twist off.  
8. Loosen the wheel nut by pulling up on the handle of the lug nut  
wrench about one-half turn (counterclockwise). Do not remove the  
wheel lug nuts until you raise the tire off the ground.  
Replacing the tire  
1. Assemble the jack handle sections together and lock into the jack. Use  
the jack handle to slide the jack under the vehicle.  
To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your  
body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the  
engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for  
changing the tire.  
2. Position the jack to raise the front or rear wheel.  
115  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Never use the front or rear  
differential as a jacking point.  
Rear axle jacking points - All  
models except E-350 Dual Rear  
Wheel (DRW) and E-450:  
Rear axle jacking points - E-350  
Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) and  
E-450:  
116  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Front axle jacking points:  
Place the jack under the pin on the  
front surface of the front axle.  
Do not place the jack under or  
on the steering linkage.  
Raise the jack until the wheel is  
completely off the ground. (Turn  
jack handle clockwise if your  
vehicle is equipped with a  
screw-type jack or pump the jack  
if equipped with a hydraulic  
jack.)  
Remove the lug nuts with the lug  
nut wrench.  
Replace the flat tire with the  
spare tire.  
If your vehicle has single rear wheels, thread the lug nuts on the studs  
with the beveled face toward the wheel.  
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, thread the two element swiveling  
lug nuts on the studs with the flange facing toward the wheel.  
3. Use the lug nut wrench to screw the lug nut snugly against the wheel.  
4. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.  
5. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the following pattern  
(Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for  
the proper lug nut torque specification):  
5-lug wheel  
1
3
4
5
2
117  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
8-lug wheel  
Never use wheels or lug  
nuts different than the  
original equipment as this could  
damage the wheel or mounting  
system. This damage could allow  
the wheels to come off while the  
vehicle is being driven.  
6. Install any wheel covers,  
ornaments or hub caps. Make sure they are screwed or snapped in place.  
7. Stow the jack, handle and lug wrench.  
8. Unblock the wheels.  
Stowing the flat/spare tire  
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in  
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.  
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction  
specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack  
hardware.  
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer  
through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at  
the end of the cable.  
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed  
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle  
increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when  
the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your  
ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare  
tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier  
ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your dealer for  
assistance at your earliest convenience.  
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly  
tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not  
move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the  
spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire.  
118  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire  
pressure (every six months, per Scheduled Maintenance Guide), or at  
any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other  
components.  
6. If removed, install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the bumper  
drive tube with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.  
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS  
On vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, retighten the lug nuts to  
the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km) after any wheel disturbance  
(tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).  
On vehicles equipped with dual rear wheels, retighten the wheel lug nuts  
to the specified torque at 100 miles (160 km), and again at 500 miles  
(800 km) of new vehicle operation and after any wheel disturbance (tire  
rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).  
Bolt size  
Wheel lug nut torque*  
lb.ft.  
100  
140  
Nm  
E-150: 1/2–20  
E-250, E-350 and  
E-450: 9/16–18  
135  
190  
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and  
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.  
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts,  
apply one drop of motor oil between  
the flat washer and the nut. Do not  
apply motor oil to the wheel nut  
threads or the wheel stud threads.  
119  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or  
foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel  
or the surface of the front disc brake hub and rotor that contacts the  
wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the  
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the  
wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of  
control.  
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL  
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized  
information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and  
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a  
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and  
in case of a recall.  
Information on “P” type tires  
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a  
tire size, load index and speed  
rating. The definitions of these  
items are listed below. (Note that  
the tire size, load index and speed  
rating for your vehicle may be  
different from this example.)  
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by  
the Tire and Rim Association  
(T&RA), that may be used for  
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and  
light trucks.  
Note: If your tire size does not  
begin with a letter this may mean it  
is designated by either ETRTO  
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire  
Manufacturing Association).  
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from  
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the  
wider the tire.  
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to  
width.  
120  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.  
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your  
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel  
diameter.  
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how  
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your  
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.  
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not  
required by federal law.  
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the  
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of  
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires  
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation  
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference  
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph  
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.  
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not  
required by federal law.  
Letter rating  
Speed rating - mph (km/h)  
81 mph (130 km/h)  
87 mph (140 km/h)  
99 mph (159 km/h)  
106 mph (171 km/h)  
112 mph (180 km/h)  
118 mph (190 km/h)  
124 mph (200 km/h)  
130 mph (210 km/h)  
149 mph (240 km/h)  
168 mph (270 km/h)  
186 mph (299 km/h)  
M
N
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
W
Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240  
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with  
a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire  
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.  
121  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the  
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The  
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was  
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four  
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,  
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers  
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The  
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This  
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.  
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or  
AT: All Terrain, or  
AS: All Season.  
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of  
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and  
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the  
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.  
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and  
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the tire label or the  
safety certification label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of  
the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.  
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades  
Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the  
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150  
would wear one and one-half (112) times as well on the government  
course as a tire graded 100.  
Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,  
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement  
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test  
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor  
traction performance.  
Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,  
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its  
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.  
122  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire  
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at  
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is  
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation  
pressure which can be found on either the tire label or certification label  
which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold  
inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended  
pressure on the vehicle label.  
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such  
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.  
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type  
tires  
“LT” type tires have some additional  
information beyond those of “P”  
type tires; these differences are  
described below:  
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by  
the Tire and Rim Association  
(T&RA), that is intended for service  
on light trucks.  
2. Load Range/Load Inflation  
Limits: Indicates the tire’s  
load-carrying capabilities and its  
inflation limits.  
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)  
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the  
maximum load and tire pressure  
when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a  
total of six or more tires on the vehicle).  
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the  
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;  
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.  
123  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Information on “T” type tires  
“T” type tires have some additional  
information beyond those of “P”  
type tires; these differences are  
described below:  
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire  
size.  
Note: The temporary tire size for  
your vehicle may be different from  
this example.  
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,  
designated by the Tire and Rim  
Association (T&RA), that is  
intended for temporary service on  
cars, SUVs, minivans and light  
trucks.  
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width  
of the tire in millimeters from  
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the  
wider the tire.  
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to  
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.  
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.  
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.  
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your  
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel  
diameter.  
Location of the tire label  
You will find a tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and  
other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the  
driver’s door.  
124  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
TIRE CARE  
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can also cause tires to wear  
abnormally. Here are some of the important maintenance items:  
Tire wear  
Measure and inspect the tire tread on all your tires periodically.  
Advanced and unusual tire wear can reduce the ability of tread to grip  
the road in adverse (wet, snowy, etc.) conditions. Visually check your  
tires for uneven wear, looking for high and low areas or unusually  
smooth areas. Also check for signs of tire damage.  
When the tread is worn down to  
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must  
be replaced to prevent your vehicle  
from skidding and hydroplaning.  
Built-in treadwear indicators, or  
“wear bars”, which look like narrow  
strips of smooth rubber across the  
tread will appear on the tire when  
the tread is worn down to 1/16th of  
an inch (2 mm). When the tire tread  
wears down to the same height as  
these “wear bars”, the tire is worn  
out and should be replaced.  
Inspect your tires frequently for any  
of the following conditions and  
replace them if one or more of the  
following conditions exist:  
Fabric showing through the tire  
rubber  
Bulges in the tread or sidewalls  
Cracks or cuts on the sidewalls  
Cracks in the tread groove  
Impact damage resulting from use  
Separation in the tread  
Separation in the sidewall  
Severe abrasion on the sidewall  
If your vehicle has a leak in the exhaust system, a road tire or the spare  
tire may be exposed to hot exhaust temperatures requiring the tire to be  
replaced.  
125  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Safety practices  
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.  
Observe posted speed limits  
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns  
Avoid potholes and objects on the road  
Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking  
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly  
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an  
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.  
Never spin the tires in excess of the 35 mph (55 km/h) point  
indicated on the speedometer.  
Highway hazards  
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you  
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the  
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but  
your safety is more important.  
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you  
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your  
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and  
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,  
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If  
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair  
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.  
Tire and wheel alignment  
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your  
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your  
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be  
out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a Ford or  
Lincoln/Mercury dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.  
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid  
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician  
at a Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles  
and those with an independent rear suspension (if equipped) may  
require alignment of all four wheels.  
126  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and  
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.  
Tire rotation  
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the  
Scheduled Maintenance Guide that comes with your vehicle) will help  
your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and  
longer tire life. Unless otherwise specified, rotate the tires approximately  
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).  
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)  
vehicles (front tires at top of  
diagram)  
127  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)  
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive  
(4WD)/ All Wheel Drive (AWD)  
vehicles (front tires at top of  
diagram)  
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.  
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a  
Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealership to check for and correct any wheel  
misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire  
rotation.  
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A  
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is  
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If  
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use  
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.  
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked  
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.  
128  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS  
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you  
currently have on your vehicle.  
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in  
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow  
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel  
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip  
aluminum wheels.  
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:  
Use only SAE Class S chains.  
Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any  
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.  
Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your  
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove  
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.  
If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.  
Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use  
tire chains on dry roads.  
The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle  
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when  
using snow tires and chains.  
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER  
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or  
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating  
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will  
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading  
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining  
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s  
Safety Certification Label and Tire Label:  
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of  
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or  
optional equipment.  
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you  
picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.  
129  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,  
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load  
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.  
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle  
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable  
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These  
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label  
located on the driver’s door or B-Pillar. The total load on each  
axle must never exceed its GAWR.  
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits  
could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance,  
engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the  
vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.  
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in  
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your  
dealership.  
130  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +  
passengers.  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight  
Rating) – is the maximum  
allowable weight of the fully loaded  
vehicle (including all options,  
equipment, passengers and cargo).  
The GVWR is shown on the  
Safety Compliance Certification  
Label located on the driver’s  
door or B-Pillar. The GVW must  
never exceed the GVWR.  
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label vehicle weight rating  
limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or  
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious  
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.  
131  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle  
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable  
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and  
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.  
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at  
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe  
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing  
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The  
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.  
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a  
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only  
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of  
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel  
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your dealership (or  
the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your dealership) for  
more detailed information.  
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount  
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.  
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000  
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.  
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply  
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875  
lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)  
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the  
certification label.  
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities  
than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR  
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the  
originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.  
132  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in  
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.  
Steps for determining the correct load limit:  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo  
should never exceed XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will  
be riding in your vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX  
kilograms or XXX pounds.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage  
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and  
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of  
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400 – 750 (5 x  
150) = 650 lb.).  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on  
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be  
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this  
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.  
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:  
An example for your vehicle with 1400 pounds of cargo and luggage  
capacity. You decide to go golfing. You and your friends average 220  
pounds each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 pounds each.  
Is there enough load capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all  
the golf bags? The calculation would be: 1400 – (5 x 220) – (5 x 30) =  
1400 – 1100 – 150 = 150 pounds; yes, you have enough load capacity  
in your vehicle to transport 4 of your friends and golf bags.  
133  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Another example for your vehicle with 1400 pounds of cargo and  
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up  
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio  
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of  
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100  
pound bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport  
the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weighed 220  
pounds, the calculation would be: 1400 – (2 x 220) – (12 x 100) =  
1400 – 440 – 1200 = – 40 pounds; no, you do not have enough cargo  
capacity to carry that much weight. You will need to reduce the load  
weight by at least 240 pounds. If you remove 3-100 pound cement  
bags, then the load calculation would be:  
1400 – (2 x 220) – (9 x 100) = 1400 – 440 – 900 = 60 pounds; now you  
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.  
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your  
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross  
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Certification label  
found on the driver’s door.  
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and  
utility-type vehicles  
For important information regarding safe operation of this type  
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in  
this chapter.  
Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles.  
Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping  
distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.  
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.  
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and  
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.  
134  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
TRAILER TOWING  
Your vehicle may tow a class I, II or III trailer, provided the maximum  
trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed  
for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts.  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights  
Maximum  
Loaded  
Trailer Weight  
- lb. (kg)  
Maximum  
frontal area of  
trailer - ft2  
(m2)  
Rear  
axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Engine  
E-150 Regular Van (6700 GVWR)  
11500  
4.6L  
5.4L  
3.55  
3.55  
6500 (2948)  
6900 (3130)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5216)  
12000  
(5443)  
E-150 Regular Van (Crew) (6700 GVWR)  
11500  
4.6L  
5.4L  
3.55  
3.55  
6200 (2812)  
6600 (2994)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5216)  
12000  
(5443)  
E-150 Regular Van (7000 GVWR)  
11500  
4.6L  
5.4L  
3.55  
3.55  
6500 (2948)  
6900 (3130)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5216)  
12000  
(5443)  
E-150 Regular Wagon (7–passenger) (7000 GVWR)  
11500  
4.6L  
5.4L  
3.55  
3.55  
5800 (2631)  
6200 (2812)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5216)  
12000  
(5443)  
E-150 Regular Wagon (8–passenger) (7000 GVWR)  
11500  
4.6L  
5.4L  
3.55  
3.55  
6100 (2767)  
6500 (2948)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5216)  
12000  
(5443)  
135  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights  
Maximum  
Loaded  
Trailer Weight  
- lb. (kg)  
Maximum  
frontal area of  
trailer - ft2  
(m2)  
Rear  
axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Engine  
.E-250 Regular Van (8600 GVWR)  
11000  
4.6L  
5.4L  
4.10  
3.73  
5600 (2540)  
7500 (3402)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(4990)  
13000  
(5897)  
E-250 Regular Van (Crew) (8600 GVWR)  
11000  
4.6L  
5.4L  
4.10  
3.73  
5300 (2404)  
7300 (3311)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(4990)  
13000  
(5897)  
E-250 Extended Van (8600 GVWR)  
11000  
4.6L  
5.4L  
4.10  
3.73  
5400 (2449)  
7300 (3311)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(4990)  
13000  
(5897)  
E-250 Extended Van (Crew) (8600 GVWR)  
11000  
4.6L  
5.4L  
4.10  
3.73  
5300 (2404)  
7300 (3311)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(4990)  
13000  
(5897)  
E-350 Regular Van (9500 GVWR)  
12000  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.55  
6300 (2858)  
7300 (3311)  
9200 (4173)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5443)  
13000  
(5897)  
15000  
(6804)  
17700  
(7711)  
4.10  
3.73  
4.10  
136  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights  
Maximum  
Loaded  
Trailer Weight  
- lb. (kg)  
Maximum  
frontal area of  
trailer - ft2  
(m2)  
Rear  
axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Engine  
E-350 Regular Van (Crew) (9500 GVWR)  
12000  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.55  
4.10  
3.73  
4.10  
6100 (2767)  
7100 (3221)  
9000 (4082)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5443)  
13000  
(5897)  
15000  
(6804)  
17700  
(7711)  
E-350 Extended Van (9400 GVWR)  
12000  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.55  
6200 (2812)  
7200 (3266)  
9000 (4082)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5443)  
13000  
(5897)  
15000  
(6804)  
17700  
(7711)  
4.10  
3.73  
4.10  
E-350 Extended Van (Crew) (9250 GVWR)  
12000  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.55  
4.10  
3.73  
4.10  
6000 (2722)  
7000 (3175)  
8800 (3992)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5443)  
13000  
(5897)  
15000  
(6804)  
17700  
(7711)  
137  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights  
Maximum  
Loaded  
Trailer Weight  
- lb. (kg)  
Maximum  
frontal area of  
trailer - ft2  
(m2)  
Rear  
axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Engine  
E-350 Regular Wagon (7–passenger) (8600 GVWR)  
13000  
(5897)  
5.4L  
3.73  
6800 (3084)  
60 (5.52)  
E-350 Regular Wagon (7–passenger) (8700 GVWR)  
15000  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
8600 (3901)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(6804)  
17700  
(7711)  
E-350 Regular Wagon (8–passenger) (8600 GVWR)  
13000  
(5897)  
5.4L  
3.73  
7000 (3175)  
60 (5.52)  
E-350 Regular Wagon (8–passenger) (8700 GVWR)  
15000  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
8800 (3992)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(6804)  
17700  
(7711)  
E-350 Regular Wagon (12–passenger) (8600 GVWR)  
13000  
(5897)  
5.4L  
3.73  
6900 (3130)  
60 (5.52)  
E-350 Regular Wagon (12–passenger) (8700 GVWR)  
15000  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
8700 (3946)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(6804)  
17700  
(7711)  
138  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights  
Maximum  
Loaded  
Trailer Weight  
- lb. (kg)  
Maximum  
frontal area of  
trailer - ft2  
(m2)  
Rear  
axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Engine  
E-350 Extended Wagon (12–passenger) (9300 GVWR)  
12000  
5.4L  
5.4L  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.55  
4.10  
3.73  
4.10  
5700 (2585)  
6700 (3039)  
8400 (3810)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5443)  
13000  
(5897)  
15000  
(6804)  
17700  
(7711)  
E-350 Extended Wagon (15–passenger) (9100 GVWR)  
12000  
5.4L  
5.4L  
3.55  
4.10  
5600 (2540)  
6600 (2994)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5443)  
13000  
(5897)  
E-350 Extended Wagon (15–passenger) (9300 GVWR)  
15000  
6.8L  
6.8L  
3.73  
4.10  
8400 (3810)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(6804)  
17700  
(7711)  
E-350 Cutaway (138” wheelbase, single rear wheel) (9600  
GVWR)  
13000  
5.4L  
6.8L  
4.10  
4.10  
7900 (3583)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5897)  
18500  
(8391)  
139  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights  
Maximum  
Loaded  
Trailer Weight  
- lb. (kg)  
Maximum  
frontal area of  
trailer - ft2  
(m2)  
Rear  
axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Engine  
E-350 Cutaway (138” wheelbase, dual rear wheel) (10700  
GVWR)  
13000  
5.4L  
6.8L  
4.10  
4.10  
7800 (3538)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5897)  
18500  
(8391)  
E-350 Cutaway (158” wheelbase, dual rear wheel) (11500  
GVWR)  
13000  
5.4L  
6.8L  
4.10  
4.10  
7700 (3493)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5897)  
18500  
(8391)  
E-350 Cutaway (176” wheelbase, dual rear wheel) (11500  
GVWR)  
13000  
5.4L  
6.8L  
4.10  
4.10  
7700 (3493)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5897)  
18500  
(8391)  
E-350 Stripped Chassis (138” wheelbase) (9600 GVWR)  
13000  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.55/4.10  
4.10  
8800 (3992)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5897)  
18500  
(8391)  
E-350 Stripped Chassis (158” wheelbase) (9600 GVWR)  
13000  
5.4L  
6.8L  
3.55/4.10  
4.10  
8700 (3946)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5897)  
18500  
(8391)  
140  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights  
Maximum  
Loaded  
Trailer Weight  
- lb. (kg)  
Maximum  
frontal area of  
trailer - ft2  
(m2)  
Rear  
axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Engine  
E-350 Stripped Chassis (138” wheelbase) (10000 GVWR)  
13000  
5.4L  
6.8L  
4.10  
4.10  
8500 (3856)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5897)  
18500  
(8391)  
E-350 Stripped Chassis (158” wheelbase) (10000 GVWR)  
13000  
5.4L  
6.8L  
4.10  
4.10  
8400 (3810)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5897)  
18500  
(8391)  
E-350 Stripped Chassis (158” wheelbase) (11000 GVWR)  
13000  
5.4L  
6.8L  
4.10  
4.10  
8400 (3810)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5897)  
18500  
(8391)  
E-350 Stripped Chassis (176” wheelbase) (10000 GVWR)  
13000  
5.4L  
6.8L  
4.10  
4.10  
8400 (3810)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5897)  
18500  
(8391)  
E-350 Stripped Chassis (176” wheelbase) (11000 GVWR)  
13000  
5.4L  
6.8L  
4.10  
4.10  
8400 (3810)  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
60 (5.52)  
(5897)  
18500  
(8391)  
E-450 Cutaway (158” wheelbase) (14050 GVWR)  
20000  
(9072)  
6.8L  
4.56  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
141  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating)/Trailer Weights  
Maximum  
Loaded  
Trailer Weight  
- lb. (kg)  
Maximum  
frontal area of  
trailer - ft2  
(m2)  
Rear  
axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Engine  
E-450 Cutaway (176” wheelbase) (14050 GVWR)  
20000  
(9072)  
6.8L  
4.56  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
E-450 Stripped Chassis (158” wheelbase) (14050 GVWR)  
18500  
(8391)  
6.8L  
4.56  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
E-450 Stripped Chassis (176” wheelbase) (14050 GVWR)  
18500  
(8391)  
6.8L  
4.56  
10000 (4536)  
60 (5.52)  
Maximum trailer weight for all cutaway (E-350 and E-450) vehicles  
must be calculated by subtracting the weight of the vehicle (including  
incomplete vehicle weight and payload which includes second unit  
body weight, cargo and passengers) from the GCW. Otherwise,  
maximum trailer weight is 10,000 lb. (4536 kg).  
For high altitude operation reduce GCWR by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300  
meters) elevation.  
To determine the maximum trailer weight designed for your particular  
vehicle as equipped, follow the section Calculating the load your  
vehicle can tow/carry earlier in this chapter.  
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so  
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.  
Distribute the load so that only 10–15% of the total is on the tongue. Tie  
down the load so that it does not shift and change the weight on the  
hitch.  
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,  
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these  
components carefully after any towing operation.  
Note: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the  
certification label.  
142  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer  
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in  
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle  
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.  
Preparing to tow  
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is  
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer  
dealer if you require assistance.  
Hitches  
Do not use or install hitches that clamp onto the bumper or to the axle.  
Underbody hitches are acceptable if installed properly.  
Safety chains  
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers  
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the  
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.  
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency  
gives to you.  
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.  
Trailer brakes  
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are  
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s  
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal  
regulations.  
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your  
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough  
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.  
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the  
GVWR not GCWR.  
Trailer lamps  
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running  
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your  
dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for  
hooking up trailer lamps.  
143  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Using a step bumper (if equipped)  
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a  
ball with a one inch (25.4 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a 5,000  
lb. (2,270 kg) trailer weight and 500 lb. (227 kg) tongue weight capacity.  
If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a  
frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed.  
Driving while you tow  
When towing a trailer:  
Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off  
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.  
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) for the first 500 miles (800 km) of  
towing and do not perform fast accelerations from a stop during this  
time.  
Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.  
To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist  
in transmission cooling.  
Anticipate stops and brake gradually.  
When descending long, steep downhill grades, always use a lower gear to  
provide engine braking to save wear on brakes. Use Drive (Overdrive  
OFF) on moderately steep hills, Second (2) on steep hills, and First (1)  
on very steep hills. Do not apply your brakes continuously, as they  
may overheat and become less effective.  
Servicing after towing  
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more  
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide  
for more information.  
Trailer towing tips  
Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to  
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make  
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.  
Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.  
The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer  
weight.  
144  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly  
conditions, at GCW, or any combination of these factors, consider  
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube. Refer to the  
Maintenance and specifications chapter for the lubricant  
specification.  
Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) after changing  
the rear axle lube  
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) for the first 500 miles (800 km) of  
towing and do not perform and fast accelerations from a stop during  
this time.  
After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your  
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.  
When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather, place  
the gearshift in P (Park) and increase idle speed. This aids engine  
cooling and air conditioner efficiency.  
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must  
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.  
Launching or retrieving a boat  
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer  
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the  
trailer is removed from the water.  
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:  
do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of  
the rear bumper.  
do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the  
bottom edge of the rear bumper.  
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:  
causing internal damage to the components.  
affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.  
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in  
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed  
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.  
145  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND)  
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle on a  
trip behind a motorhome. Follow these guidelines if you have the need  
for recreational towing of your vehicle with all four wheels on the  
ground. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission  
is not damaged.  
2WD vehicles (with automatic transmissions):  
Place the transmission in N (Neutral)  
Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h)  
Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km)  
If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must  
be exceeded, the drive shaft will have to be removed.  
Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified  
technician. See your local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.  
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause  
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal  
transmission components.  
146  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Driving  
STARTING  
Positions of the ignition  
1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical  
accessories such as the radio to  
operate while the engine is not  
running.  
4
3
1
5
2. LOCK, locks the automatic  
transmission gearshift lever and  
allows key removal.  
2
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all  
accessories without locking the  
steering wheel. This position also allows the automatic transmission shift  
lever to be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal  
being depressed.  
When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the  
automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P  
(Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted  
vehicle movement, always set the parking brake.  
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key  
position when driving.  
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine  
starts.  
Preparing to start your vehicle  
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This  
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard  
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio  
noise.  
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before  
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty  
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to  
Starting the engine in this chapter.  
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high  
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk  
of fire or other damage.  
147  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry  
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine  
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.  
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed  
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door  
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in  
this chapter for more instructions.  
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer  
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell  
exhaust fumes.  
Important safety precautions  
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If  
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle  
checked. If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing  
snow conditions, the engine air induction may become partially clogged  
with snow and/or ice. If this occurs, the engine may experience a  
significant reduction in power output. At the earliest opportunity, clear  
all the snow and/or ice away from the air induction inlet. The following  
starting instructions are for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine; if  
your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel engine, refer to Starting the  
engine in the your Diesel owner guide supplement.  
Before starting the vehicle:  
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more  
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating  
and Safety Restraints chapter.  
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.  
148  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Make sure the parking brake is  
set.  
Make sure the gearshift is in P  
(Park).  
Turn the key to 4 (ON) without  
turning the key to 5 (START).  
4
3
1
5
2
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a  
light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced.  
If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the  
light may not illuminate.  
149  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Starting the engine  
1. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without  
turning the key to 5 (START).  
4
2. Turn the key to 5 (START), then  
release the key as soon as the  
engine starts. Excessive cranking  
could damage the starter.  
3
1
5
2
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,  
turn the key to 3 (OFF), wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still  
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will  
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is  
flooded with fuel.  
Using the engine block heater (if equipped)  
Use of an engine block heater is strongly recommended if you live in a  
region where temperatures reach -10°F (-23°C) or below. For best  
results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle.  
The heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle.  
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater  
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)  
adapters.  
Guarding against exhaust fumes  
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid  
its dangerous effects.  
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer  
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell  
exhaust fumes.  
Important ventilating information  
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of  
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating  
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.  
150  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
BRAKES  
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding  
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out  
and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. If the vehicle  
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,  
the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician.  
Refer to Brake system warning  
!
P
light in the Instrument Cluster  
chapter for information on the brake  
system warning light.  
BRAKE  
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)  
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This  
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by  
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and  
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the  
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is  
done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal  
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.  
ABS warning lamp  
The ABS lamp in the instrument  
cluster momentarily illuminates  
ABS  
when the ignition is turned on. If  
the light does not illuminate during  
start up, remains on or flashes, the  
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.  
Even when the ABS is disabled,  
normal braking is still effective. (If  
your BRAKE warning lamp  
illuminates with the parking brake  
released, have your brake system  
serviced immediately.)  
!
P
BRAKE  
Using ABS  
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake  
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the  
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping  
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain  
full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces.  
However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.  
151  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Parking brake  
To set the parking brake (1), press  
the parking brake pedal down until  
the pedal stops.  
To release, pull the lever (2).  
Always set the parking  
brake fully and make sure  
that the gearshift is securely  
latched in P (Park).  
The BRAKE warning lamp will  
illuminate and will remain  
illuminated until the parking brake  
is released.  
!
P
BRAKE  
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.  
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop  
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the  
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the  
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.  
STEERING  
To prevent damage to the power steering system:  
Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it  
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.  
Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level  
(If the fluid level is below the FULL COLD range on the dipstick).  
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned  
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.  
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:  
an improperly inflated tire  
uneven tire wear  
loose or worn suspension components  
loose or worn steering components  
improper steering alignment  
152  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering  
seem to wander/pull.  
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)  
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when  
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the  
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may  
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.  
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.  
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE  
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than  
other types of vehicles.  
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely  
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.  
Your vehicle has larger tires and increased ground clearance, giving the  
vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.  
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and  
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a  
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not  
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more  
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under  
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt  
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in  
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal  
injury and death.  
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle  
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions such as  
slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when  
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.  
VEHICLE STABILITY AND HANDLING  
The risk of a rollover crash increases as the number of people and load  
in the vehicle increase. This increased risk occurs because the passenger  
weight and load raises the vehicle’s center of gravity and causes it to  
153  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
shift rearward. As a result, the van has less resistance to rollover and  
handles differently from other commonly driven passenger vehicles,  
making it more difficult to control in an emergency situation. Placing any  
load on the roof also raises the center of gravity and increases the  
potential for rollover.  
The van should be operated by an experienced driver. An organization  
that owns a 15–passenger van should select one or two experienced  
drivers to drive the van on a regular basis. These drivers will gain  
valuable experience handling the van. This experience will help make  
each trip safer.  
The van should be operated at a safe speed which, in some conditions,  
may be less than the posted speed limit.  
Further, all occupants should be properly restrained. Most people killed  
in rollover crashes were unbelted. Occupants can dramatically reduce  
their risk of being killed or seriously injured in a rollover crash by simply  
using their seat belts. Organizations that own 15–passenger vans should  
have a written seat belt use policy. Drivers should be responsible for  
enforcing the policy.  
EMERGENCY MANEUVERS  
In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn  
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,  
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid  
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,  
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or  
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are  
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could  
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover  
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the  
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.  
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not  
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.  
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and  
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a  
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not  
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more  
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under  
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt  
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in  
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal  
injury and death.  
154  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from  
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle  
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,  
avoid these abrupt inputs.  
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION  
Brake-shift interlock  
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents  
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is  
in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed.  
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in  
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:  
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the  
key.  
2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift  
to N (Neutral).  
When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the  
automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P  
(Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted  
vehicle movement, always set the parking brake.  
3. Start the vehicle.  
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,  
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not  
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside  
Emergencies chapter.  
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps  
are working.  
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is  
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and  
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.  
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp  
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.  
See your dealer or a qualified service technician as soon as possible.  
155  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic  
transmission  
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.  
Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and  
shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any  
type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal  
shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations  
when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive  
Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating  
parameters. This learning process could take several transmission  
upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer  
shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift  
scheduling will resume.  
P (Park)  
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from  
turning.  
To put your vehicle in gear:  
Start the engine  
Depress the brake pedal  
Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear  
To put your vehicle in P (Park):  
Come to a complete stop  
Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)  
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is  
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and  
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.  
R (Reverse)  
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.  
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R  
(Reverse).  
156  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
N (Neutral)  
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is  
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.  
(Overdrive)  
The normal driving position for the  
best fuel economy. Transmission  
operates in gears one through four.  
Overdrive can be deactivated by  
pressing the transmission control  
OVERDRIVE OFF  
switch on the end of the gearshift  
lever.  
This transmission control indicator  
light (TCIL) will illuminate on the  
end of the gearshift.  
OVERDRIVE  
Drive (not shown)  
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.  
This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.  
O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.  
Provides engine braking.  
Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to  
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer  
towing and when engine braking is required.  
To return to O/D (Overdrive), press the transmission control switch.  
The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.  
O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned  
off.  
2 (Second)  
This position allows for second gear only.  
Provides engine braking.  
Use to start-up on slippery roads.  
To return to  
(Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the  
(Overdrive) position.  
157  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to  
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.  
1 (First)  
Provides maximum engine braking.  
Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.  
Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)  
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.  
Forced downshifts  
Allowed in  
(Overdrive) or Drive.  
Depress the accelerator to the floor.  
Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.  
Understanding the shift positions of the 5–speed automatic  
transmission (if equipped - 5.4L and 6.8L gasoline engines only)  
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.  
Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and  
shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any  
type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal  
shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations  
when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive  
Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating  
parameters. This learning process could take several transmission  
upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer  
shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift  
scheduling will resume.  
P (Park)  
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from  
turning.  
To put your vehicle in gear:  
Start the engine  
Depress the brake pedal  
Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear  
158  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
To put your vehicle in P (Park):  
Come to a complete stop  
Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)  
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is  
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and  
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.  
R (Reverse)  
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.  
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R  
(Reverse).  
N (Neutral)  
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is  
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.  
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF  
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF is the normal driving position for the  
best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and  
downshifts through gears one through five.  
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul ON  
The Tow/Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a  
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when  
using Tow/Haul.  
To activate Tow/Haul, press the  
button on the end of the gearshift  
lever.  
The TOW HAUL indicator light will  
illuminate on the end of the  
gearshift lever.  
159  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Tow/Haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.  
Tow/Haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the  
transmission is in the D (Overdrive) position; this engine braking will  
slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when  
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load  
conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control  
the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the accelerator pedal  
being pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based  
upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed.  
To deactivate the Tow/Haul feature and return to normal driving mode,  
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light  
will no longer be illuminated.  
When you shut-off and restart the engine, the transmission will  
automatically return to normal D (Overdrive) mode (Tow/Haul OFF).  
Do not use the Tow/Haul feature when driving in icy or slippery  
conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear  
wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss  
of vehicle control..  
3 (Third)  
Transmission operates up to third gear only.  
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)  
provides engine braking.  
2 (Second)  
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional  
engine braking on downgrades.  
1 (First)  
Provides maximum engine braking.  
Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.  
The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it  
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the  
vehicle reaches slower speeds.  
Forced downshifts  
Allowed in  
(Overdrive) or Drive.  
Depress the accelerator to the floor.  
Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.  
160  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Understanding the shift positions of the 5–speed automatic  
transmission (if equipped - diesel engines only)  
P (Park)  
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from  
turning.  
To put your vehicle in gear:  
Start the engine  
Depress the brake pedal  
Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear  
To put your vehicle in P (Park):  
Come to a complete stop  
Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)  
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is  
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and  
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.  
R (Reverse)  
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.  
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R  
(Reverse).  
N (Neutral)  
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is  
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.  
D (Drive) with Overdrive  
D (Drive) with Overdrive is the normal driving position for the best fuel  
economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and  
downshifts through gears one through five.  
161  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
D (Drive) without Overdrive  
D (Drive) without Overdrive can be  
activated by pressing the  
transmission control switch (TCS)  
on the end of the gearshift lever.  
OVERDRIVE OFF  
This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.  
The OFF lamp on the gearshift  
lever is illuminated.  
OVERDRIVE  
Provides engine braking.  
Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to  
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer  
towing and when engine braking is required.  
To return to O/D (Overdrive), press the transmission control switch.  
The OFF lamp on the gearshift lever will not be illuminated.  
O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned  
off.  
3 (Third)  
Transmission operates up to third gear only.  
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)  
provides additional engine braking.  
2 (Second)  
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional  
engine braking on downgrades.  
1 (First)  
Provides maximum engine braking.  
Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.  
The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it  
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the  
vehicle reaches slower speeds.  
162  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
Forced downshifts  
Allowed in D (Drive) with Overdrive or D (Drive) without Overdrive.  
Depress the accelerator to the floor.  
Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.  
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement  
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but  
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the  
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering  
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.  
It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow  
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose  
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too  
sharply or abruptly.  
It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway  
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a  
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide  
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the  
safety of others should be your primary concern.  
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and  
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a  
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not  
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more  
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under  
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt  
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in  
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal  
injury and death.  
163  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving  
VEHICLE USED AS A STATIONARY POWER SOURCE  
Auxiliary equipment called power take-off, or PTO, is often added to the  
engine or transmission to operate utility equipment. Examples include  
wheel-lift for tow trucks, tools for construction, and cranes. PTO  
applications draw auxiliary horsepower from the powertrain, often while  
the vehicle is stationary. In this condition there is limited cooling air flow  
through the radiator and around the vehicle that normally occurs when a  
vehicle is moving. Depending on the level and duration of auxiliary  
horsepower draw, vehicle and surrounding environmental conditions, and  
other factors, this can contribute to elevated transmission fluid  
temperatures and resultant accelerated fluid deterioration, fuel vapor  
over-pressurization, and other concerns. Ford trucks are fully qualified  
for stationary PTO operation for 10 minutes or less of continuous  
operation. For extended duration stationary PTO operation (beyond 10  
minutes) diesel engine is recommended, and further consult your  
aftermarket PTO installer.  
A more complete description of PTO operation is discussed in the Ford  
Truck Body Builders Layout Book, found at  
www.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas.  
DRIVING THROUGH WATER  
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very  
slowly especially when the depth is not known. Never drive through  
water that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the  
bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). When driving through water,  
traction or brake capability may be limited. Also, water may enter your  
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may  
stall. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent  
tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and  
cause internal transmission damage.  
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your  
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.  
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.  
164  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Roadside Emergencies  
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE  
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor  
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This  
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service  
is available:  
24–hours, seven days a week  
for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 36,000  
miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury  
vehicles, and four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km) on Lincoln  
vehicles.  
Roadside assistance will cover:  
a flat tire change with a good spare (except Ford GT which has a tire  
inflation kit)  
battery jump start  
lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s  
responsibility)  
fuel delivery (2.0 gallons [7.5L], maximum two occurrences within 12  
month period)  
towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company  
dealership, or your selling dealer if within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the  
nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement).  
Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents, are covered (some  
exclusions apply, such as impound towing or repossession).  
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for  
information on:  
coverage period  
exact fuel amounts  
towing of your disabled vehicle  
emergency travel expense reimbursement  
travel planning benefits  
USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE  
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your  
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the  
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is  
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.  
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,  
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.  
165  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call  
1–800–665–2006.  
Motorhome customers in the U.S and Canada should contact  
1–800–444–3311.  
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor  
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement  
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call  
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.  
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call  
1–800–665–2006.  
ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY  
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance  
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting  
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.  
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you  
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside  
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact  
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.  
HAZARD FLASHER  
The hazard flasher is located on the  
steering column, just behind the  
steering wheel. The hazard flashers  
will operate when the ignition is in  
any position or if the key is not in  
the ignition.  
Push in the flasher control and all  
front and rear direction signals will  
flash. Press the flasher control again  
to turn them off. Use it when your  
vehicle is disabled and is creating a  
safety hazard for other motorists.  
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.  
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH  
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine  
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.  
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch  
may have been activated.  
166  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Except for commercial stripped  
chassis vehicles, this switch is  
located in the front passenger’s  
footwell, by the kick panel.  
On commercial stripped chassis  
vehicles, this switch is located on a  
bracket above the brake pedal.  
To reset the switch:  
1. Turn the ignition OFF.  
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.  
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the  
switch by pushing in on the reset  
button.  
4. Turn the ignition ON.  
5. Wait a few seconds and return  
the key to OFF.  
6. Make another check for leaks.  
167  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
FUSES AND RELAYS  
Fuses  
If electrical components in the  
vehicle are not working, a fuse may  
have blown. Blown fuses are  
identified by a broken wire within  
the fuse. Check the appropriate  
fuses before replacing any electrical  
components.  
15  
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage  
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire  
damage and could start a fire.  
Standard fuse amperage rating and color  
COLOR  
Cartridge  
Fuse  
rating  
Mini  
fuses  
Standard  
fuses  
Maxi  
fuses  
Fuse link  
cartridge  
maxi  
fuses  
2A  
3A  
4A  
Grey  
Violet  
Pink  
Tan  
Grey  
Violet  
Pink  
Tan  
5A  
7.5A  
10A  
15A  
20A  
25A  
30A  
40A  
50A  
60A  
70A  
80A  
Brown  
Red  
Brown  
Red  
Yellow  
Green  
Orange  
Red  
Blue  
Tan  
Natural  
Blue  
Pink  
Green  
Red  
Blue  
Pink  
Green  
Red  
Yellow  
Brown  
Black  
Blue  
Yellow  
Natural  
Green  
Blue  
Yellow  
Natural  
Green  
Passenger compartment fuse panel  
The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by  
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.  
168  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel  
cover.  
1
2
3
4
5
42  
6
7
8
9
10  
16  
22  
11  
17  
23  
12  
18  
13  
19  
14  
20  
15  
21  
43  
44  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
35  
41  
30  
36  
31  
37  
32  
38  
33  
39  
34  
40  
The fuses are coded as follows.  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
1
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
Passenger Compartment Fuse  
Panel Description  
4–Wheel Anti–lock Brake System  
(4WABS) module  
5A  
2
3
10A  
15A  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),  
O/D cancel  
Trip computer, Radio, Video  
Cassette Player (VCP) and video  
screens, Overhead console  
Courtesy lamps  
4
5
15A  
30A  
Power lock switches, Power locks  
without RKE  
169  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
6
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
10A  
Passenger Compartment Fuse  
Panel Description  
Brake-shift interlock, Daytime  
Running Lamps (DRL) module  
Multi-function switch, Turn signals  
Radio capacitor(s), Ignition coil,  
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)  
diode, PCM power relay  
Wiper control module  
7
8
10A  
30A  
9
5A  
10  
20A  
Main light switch, Park lamps,  
License lamp (external lamps),  
Multi-function switch  
(flash-to-pass)  
11  
12  
15A  
15A  
Multi-function switch (hazards),  
Brake lamp switch, Brake lamps  
Back-up lamps, Auxiliary battery  
relay (gasoline engine only),  
Trailer tow relay  
13  
15A  
Blend door actuator, Function  
selector switch  
14  
15  
5A  
5A  
Instrument cluster  
Trailer battery charge relay,  
Cluster  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
30A  
5A  
10A  
Power seats  
Power mirrors  
Not used  
Not used  
Restraints  
Not used  
Memory power radio, Rear seat  
video control unit, Battery saver  
relay, Instrument cluster, Courtesy  
lamp relay, Accessory delay relay  
Power locks w/RKE  
15A  
23  
20A  
170  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
Passenger Compartment Fuse  
Panel Description  
Not used  
Left headlamp (low beam)  
Cigar lighter, Diagnostics  
Radio  
Not used  
Not used  
Headlamps (high beam indicator)  
Right headlamp (low beam)  
Power point #1 (instrument  
panel)  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
10A  
20A  
5A  
15A  
10A  
20A  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
10A  
5A  
Start relay  
Not used  
Not used  
Instrument illumination  
Not used  
Not used  
10A  
Trailer tow electric brake, Center  
High-Mounted Stop Lamp  
(CHMSL), Brake lamps  
Power point #2 (2nd row seating  
position - driver side)  
Modified vehicle  
40  
20A  
41  
42  
30A  
20A circuit  
breaker  
20A circuit  
breaker  
Power windows  
43  
44  
Not used  
Wiper/washer  
Power distribution box  
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The  
power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your  
vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.  
171  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current  
fuses.  
Always replace the cover to the power distribution box before  
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.  
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the  
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
The high-current fuses are coded as follows.  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
1
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
Power Distribution Box  
Description  
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)  
diode  
2
3
10A*  
Not used  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)  
module, A/C clutch  
Not used  
Horn relay  
Brake pressure switch  
4
5
6
15A*  
2A*  
172  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
7
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
Power Distribution Box  
Description  
Ignition switch, Fuse panel,  
Accessory delay  
60A**  
8
9
10  
11  
40A**  
50A**  
30A**  
60A**  
Trailer battery charge relay  
Modified vehicle power  
Electric brake controller  
4-Wheel Anti-lock Brake System  
(4WABS)  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
60A**  
20A**  
50A**  
30A**  
I/P fuses 29, 34, 35, 40 and 41  
Fuel pump relay  
Auxiliary blower relay  
Main light switch  
Not used  
Blower motor relay (blower  
motor)  
50A**  
18  
60A**  
Engine compartment fuses 3, 5,  
23 and 26, Instrument panel fuses  
26 and 32, Start relay  
IDM relay (Diesel engine only)  
Auxiliary battery relay (gasoline  
engine only), PDB fuses 8 and 24  
PCM power relay, PDB fuse 27  
I/P fuses 4, 5, 10, 11, 16, 17, 22  
and 23, Circuit breaker 44  
Not used  
Trailer tow running lamps and  
back-up lamp relays  
Not used  
Trailer tow turn signals  
PCM  
19  
20  
50A**  
60A**  
21  
22  
30A**  
60A**  
23  
24  
20A*  
25  
26  
27  
28  
A
20A*  
10A*  
Not used  
Fuel pump relay  
B
Horn relay  
173  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
Power Distribution Box  
Description  
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
Trailer back-up lamps relay  
Trailer running lamps relay  
Trailer battery charge relay  
IDM relay (Diesel only)  
PCM relay  
Blower motor relay  
Accessory delay relay  
Start relay  
K
* Mini fuses ** Maxi fuses  
Relay modules  
Instrument panel relay module  
The instrument panel relay module is located behind the radio in the  
center of the instrument panel. Have a certified technician or your dealer  
service this module, if required.  
The relays are coded as follows:  
Relay location  
Description  
Interior lamps  
Open  
Open  
Battery saver  
1
2
3
4
174  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Engine compartment relay module  
The engine compartment relay module is located in one of two places  
depending on which type of engine your vehicle is equipped with:  
Gasoline engine: driver side of the engine compartment above the  
brake master cylinder.  
Diesel engine: passenger side of the engine compartment behind the  
power distribution box.  
Have a certified technician or your dealer service this module, if  
required.  
The relays are coded as follows:  
Relay location  
Description  
1
2
3
4
PCM back-up lamp  
A/C control  
Trailer tow right turn  
Trailer tow left turn  
175  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE  
The following procedure is for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine;  
if your vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine, refer to the 6.0L Power  
Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement for  
the proper jump starting procedure.  
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,  
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or  
vehicle damage.  
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and  
clothing, if contacted.  
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic  
transmissions do not have push-start capability; doing so may  
damage the catalytic converter.  
Preparing your vehicle  
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the  
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission  
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and  
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the  
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.  
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.  
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could  
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.  
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle  
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on  
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving  
parts.  
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before  
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.  
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical  
surges. Turn all other accessories off.  
176  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Connecting the jumper cables  
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of  
the discharged battery.  
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the  
assisting (boosting) battery.  
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)  
terminal of the assisting battery.  
177  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the  
assisting battery.  
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed  
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the  
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker  
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.  
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)  
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an  
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.  
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of  
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.  
178  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
Jump starting  
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at  
moderately increased speed.  
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.  
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an  
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.  
Removing the jumper cables  
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were  
connected.  
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.  
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the  
assisting (boosting) battery.  
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the  
booster vehicle’s battery.  
179  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster  
vehicle’s battery.  
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the  
disabled vehicle’s battery.  
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables  
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can  
relearn its idle conditions.  
180  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roadside Emergencies  
WRECKER TOWING  
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing  
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your  
roadside assistance service provider.  
Ford recommends your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed. Do  
not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a  
slingbelt towing procedure.  
If your vehicle is equipped with an air dam and must be towed from the  
front, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed by wheel lift or  
flatbed equipment to prevent damage to the air dam.  
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle  
damage may occur.  
181  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
Customer Assistance  
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED  
At home  
You must take your Ford vehicle to an authorized Ford dealer for  
warranty repairs. While any Ford dealership handling your vehicle line  
will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling  
dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. Please note that  
certain warranty repairs require special training and/or equipment, so not  
all dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. This means  
that, depending on the warranty repair needed, you may have to take  
your vehicle to another dealer. A reasonable time must be allowed to  
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the dealership. Repairs will  
be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other  
parts that are authorized by Ford.  
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you  
are receiving, follow these steps:  
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your  
selling/servicing dealership.  
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales  
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.  
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company  
policies or procedures, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship  
Center at the number below.  
Away from home  
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when  
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership  
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the  
Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to  
help you.  
In the United States:  
Ford Motor Company  
Customer Relationship Center  
P.O. Box 6248  
Dearborn, MI 48121  
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)  
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)  
www.customersaskford.com  
In Canada:  
Customer Relationship Centre  
182  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited  
P.O. Box 2000  
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4  
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)  
www.ford.ca  
Away from home–motorhome service  
If you own a motorhome built on a Ford Chassis and are away from home  
when your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the  
dealership could provide, after following the steps above, contact the Ford  
Motorhome Customer Assistance Center to find an authorized dealership or  
service location to help you. In the United States and Canada:  
Ford Motorhome Customer Assistance Center  
900 N. Lake Havasu Avenue  
Lake Havasu City, AZ 86403  
1-800-444-3311  
Open 365/24/7  
In order to help service your motorhome vehicle, please have the  
following information available when contacting the Motorhome  
Customer Assistance Center:  
telephone number where you can be reached  
vehicle location (city and state)  
year and make of your vehicle  
date of vehicle purchase  
current odometer reading  
vehicle identification number (VIN)  
Additional Assistance  
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish  
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).  
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing  
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also  
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.  
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the  
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss  
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing  
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This  
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state  
created rights or other rights which are independent of the  
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.  
183  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)  
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer  
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the  
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of  
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the  
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and  
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or  
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer  
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund  
or replacement vehicle.  
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer  
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its  
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership  
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs  
first:  
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity  
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR  
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a  
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of  
the vehicle) OR  
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of  
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)  
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the  
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the  
following address:  
Ford Motor Company  
16800 Executive Plaza Drive  
Mail Drop 3NE-B  
Dearborn, MI 48126  
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY)  
The Dispute Settlement Board is:  
an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.  
available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company  
vehicles.  
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford  
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify  
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without  
incurring obligations per applicable state law.  
184  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
What kinds of cases does the Board review?  
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as  
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light  
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle  
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:  
a non-Ford product  
a non-Ford dealership  
sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated  
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as  
designed  
a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a  
service or product concern is being reviewed  
items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including  
maintenance and wear items)  
alleged personal injury/property damage claims  
cases currently in litigation  
vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes  
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to  
review commercial vehicles)  
vehicles with non-U.S. warranties  
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty  
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility  
is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle.  
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique  
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin  
purchasers/lessees.  
Board membership  
The Board consists of:  
Three consumer representatives  
A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative  
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by  
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen  
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for  
their business leadership qualities.  
185  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
What the Board needs  
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the  
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application  
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return  
receipt requested.  
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you  
will receive an acknowledgment indicating:  
The file number assigned to your application.  
The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator.  
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be  
asked to submit statements.  
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:  
Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders  
relevant to the case.  
The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed  
on your vehicle ownership license.  
The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).  
The current mileage.  
The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle.  
A brief description of your unresolved concern.  
A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor  
Company.  
The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the  
dealership(s).  
A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.  
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not  
qualify for Board review.  
Oral presentations  
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question  
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation  
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the  
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation  
may be requested by the Board as well.  
Making a decision  
Board members review all available information related to each  
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial  
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.  
186  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that  
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board  
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to  
consider some cases.  
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a  
form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of  
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but  
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to  
them under state or federal law.  
To request a DSB Brochure/Application  
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call the Board  
at the following address/phone number:  
Dispute Settlement Board  
P.O. Box 1424  
Waukesha, WI 53187–1424  
1–800–428–3718  
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center  
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952  
or by writing to the Center at the following address:  
Ford Motor Company  
Customer Relationship Center  
P.O. Box 6248  
Dearborn, Michigan 48121  
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM  
(CANADA ONLY)  
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and  
the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been  
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party  
mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor  
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).  
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy  
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a  
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is  
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal  
proceedings.  
187  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct  
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal  
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the  
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve  
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s  
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.  
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more  
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial  
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.  
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN  
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by  
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides  
the following:  
Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you  
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain  
maintenance and wear items).  
Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper  
Warranty expires.  
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln  
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in  
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored  
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement  
benefits for towing and rental coverage.  
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection  
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of  
more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of  
Canada dealers.  
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the  
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this  
information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete  
details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the  
Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.  
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA  
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the  
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you  
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.  
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock  
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or  
owner relations/customer relationship office.  
188  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may  
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause  
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of  
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper  
fuel.  
In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty  
importing your vehicle back into the U.S.  
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in  
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the  
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call:  
FORD MOTOR COMPANY  
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS  
1555 Fairlane Drive  
Fairlane Business Park #3  
Allen Park, Michigan 48101  
U.S.A.  
Telephone: (313) 594-4857  
FAX: (313) 390-0804  
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford  
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct  
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.  
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of  
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and  
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market  
Operations.  
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE  
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:  
HELM, INCORPORATED  
P.O. Box 07150  
Detroit, Michigan 48207  
Or call:  
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356  
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST  
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:  
www.helminc.com.  
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or  
money order.)  
189  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customer Assistance  
Obtaining a French owner’s guide  
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to  
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box  
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)  
If you believe that your vehicle has  
a defect which could cause a crash  
or could cause injury or death, you  
should immediately inform the  
National Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and  
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a  
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved  
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor  
Company.  
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free  
at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write  
to:  
NHTSA  
400 Seventh Street  
U.S. Department of Transportation  
Washington, D.C. 20590  
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from  
the Hotline.  
190  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
Cleaning  
WASHING THE EXTERIOR  
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral  
Ph shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available  
from your dealer.  
Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing  
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted  
surfaces.  
Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to  
strong, direct sunlight.  
Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for  
best results.  
Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to  
eliminate water spotting.  
It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the  
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause  
damage to the vehicle.  
Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings  
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s  
paintwork and trim over time.  
Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a  
car wash.  
Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted  
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,  
wash off as soon as possible.  
If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use  
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running  
board surface, as the area may become slippery.  
WAXING  
Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will  
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.  
Wash the vehicle first.  
Do not use waxes that contain abrasives.  
191  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body  
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof  
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl  
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.  
Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with the sliding door  
electrical contact switches. Paint sealant or other contaminants could  
interfere with the proper operation of the power locks or radio  
speakers. If necessary, clean the contacts with Motorcraft Bug and Tar  
Remover (ZC-42) to remove any sealant. Do not use any abrasives on  
the contact surfaces.  
PAINT CHIPS  
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color.  
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to  
your dealer to ensure you get the correct color.  
Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar  
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.  
Always read the instructions before using the products.  
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS  
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint  
finish. In order to maintain their shine:  
Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A),  
which is available from your dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust  
accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly  
with a strong stream of water.  
Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or  
covers.  
Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your  
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning  
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust  
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.  
Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel  
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.  
To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover  
(ZC-42), available from your dealer.  
192  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
ENGINE  
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt  
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:  
Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The  
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause  
damage.  
Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the  
engine block or other engine components.  
Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts  
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.  
Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning  
the engine.  
Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the  
running engine may cause internal damage.  
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS  
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are  
available from your dealer.  
For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).  
If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar  
Remover (ZC-42).  
193  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES  
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be  
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the  
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include  
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other  
organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow these tips:  
The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with  
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass  
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your dealer.  
Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.  
Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.  
Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or  
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they  
appear worn or do not function properly.  
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS  
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth.  
Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of  
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the  
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.  
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning  
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of  
the air bag system.  
Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in  
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan  
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted  
surfaces.  
INTERIOR TRIM  
Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then dry by wiping  
with a dry, soft, clean cloth.  
Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the  
finish.  
194  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
INTERIOR  
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:  
Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.  
Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Extra Strength  
Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-41).  
If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first  
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).  
Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution.  
Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can  
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of  
the seat materials.  
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s  
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.  
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)  
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the  
leather.  
To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl  
Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.  
To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe  
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.  
Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or  
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based  
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of  
the clear, protective coating.  
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet  
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the  
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.  
UNDERBODY  
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and  
door drain holes free from packed dirt.  
195  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS  
Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available  
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products  
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they  
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your  
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or  
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following products  
or products of equivalent quality:  
Motorcraft Custom Clearcoat Polish (ZC–8–A)  
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (not available in Canada) (ZC-40–A)  
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)  
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)  
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada)  
(ZC-11–A)  
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)  
Motorcraft Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada)  
(ZC-41)  
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)  
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)  
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)  
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)  
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate (ZC-17-B)  
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)  
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14)  
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)  
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)  
Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13)  
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada)  
(ZC-23)  
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20)  
196  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Maintenance and Specifications  
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS  
To help you service your vehicle:  
We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy  
location.  
We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking  
routine service easy.  
If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide  
the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide/Owner  
Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered.  
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts  
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to  
provide the best performance in your vehicle.  
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE  
Do not work on a hot engine.  
Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.  
Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed  
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.  
Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and  
all fuel related parts.  
Working with the engine off  
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).  
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.  
3. Block the wheels.  
Working with the engine on  
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).  
2. Block the wheels.  
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not  
remove it while the engine is running.  
197  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
OPENING THE HOOD  
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood  
release handle located under the  
bottom left corner of the instrument  
panel.  
HOOD  
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is  
located in the center top of the grill.  
3. Lift the hood and secure it with the prop rod.  
198  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT  
Engine compartment component locations  
Refer to the 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel  
Owner’s Guide Supplement for diesel engine component locations.  
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
2. Engine oil filler cap  
3. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick  
4. Air filter assembly  
5. Engine oil dipstick  
6. Power steering fluid reservoir  
7. Brake fluid reservoir  
8. Engine coolant reservoir  
9. Battery  
199  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID  
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the  
level is low. In very cold weather, do  
not fill the reservoir completely.  
Only use a washer fluid that meets  
Ford specification WSB-M8B16–A2.  
Refer to Lubricant specifications  
in this chapter.  
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the  
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.  
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used  
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the  
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.  
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),  
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use  
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in  
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.  
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer  
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system  
components.  
ENGINE OIL  
Checking the engine oil  
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals  
for checking the engine oil.  
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.  
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the  
oil pan.  
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P  
(Park).  
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.  
200  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
5. Locate and carefully remove the  
engine oil level indicator (dipstick).  
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it  
again.  
If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is  
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.  
If the oil level is below the MIN  
mark, add enough oil to raise the  
level within the MIN-MAX range.  
Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil  
must be removed from the engine by a service technician.  
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.  
Adding engine oil  
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine  
oil in this chapter.  
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified  
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap  
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.  
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the  
MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).  
201  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.  
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise  
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.  
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the  
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.  
Engine oil and filter recommendations  
Look for this certification  
trademark.  
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.  
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American  
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms  
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel  
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and  
Approval Committee (ISLAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese  
automobile manufacturers.  
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an  
equivalent 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A. SAE  
5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability  
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.  
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine  
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that  
is not covered by Ford warranty.  
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule  
listed in the scheduled maintenance guide.  
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for  
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used  
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up  
engine noises or knock may be experienced.  
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or  
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.  
202  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
BATTERY  
Your vehicle is equipped with a  
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery  
which normally does not require  
additional water during its life of  
service.  
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates and only for  
frame mounted deep cycle auxiliary batteries, check the battery  
electrolyte level. Note: This does not apply to production frame mounted  
or underhood batteries. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for  
the service interval schedules.  
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”.  
Do not overfill the battery cells.  
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water  
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high  
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery  
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the  
charging system checked.  
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled  
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.  
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and  
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to  
the battery terminals.  
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables  
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the  
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.  
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the  
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the  
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and  
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.  
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to  
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect  
battery performance and durability.  
203  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause  
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted  
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,  
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper  
ventilation.  
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the  
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,  
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.  
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite  
corners.  
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric  
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes  
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of  
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush  
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt  
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.  
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and  
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.  
For information on transmission operation after the battery has been  
disconnected, refer to Shift strategy in the Driving chapter.  
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,  
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When  
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must  
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and  
performance. To begin this process:  
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.  
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the  
engine.  
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.  
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.  
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.  
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with  
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for  
at least one minute.  
204  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.  
The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to  
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.  
If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle  
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle  
trim is eventually relearned.  
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,  
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is  
reconnected.  
Always dispose of automotive  
batteries in a responsible manner.  
Follow your local authorized  
standards for disposal. Call your  
local authorized recycling center  
to find out more about recycling  
automotive batteries.  
RECYCLE  
ENGINE COOLANT  
Checking engine coolant  
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the  
mileage intervals listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide. The  
coolant concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled  
water, which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant  
concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester  
(such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The  
level of coolant should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or  
within the “COLD FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls  
below, add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant  
section.  
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water  
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above  
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A  
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:  
Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).  
Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).  
Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.  
205  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.  
When the engine is cold, check the  
level of the engine coolant in the  
reservoir.  
COLD FILL LEVEL  
The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the  
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir  
(depending upon application).  
Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval  
schedules.  
Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your  
vehicle in this chapter.  
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,  
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is  
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding  
engine coolant in this chapter.  
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine  
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified  
function and vehicle location.  
Adding engine coolant  
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant  
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the  
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.  
206  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and  
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you  
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.  
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid  
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could  
make it difficult to see through the windshield.  
Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant  
(yellow-colored), VC-7–A (U.S., except CA and OR), VC-7–B  
(CA and OR only), meeting Ford Specification  
WSS-M97B51–A1.  
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, may  
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from  
yellow to golden tan.  
Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such  
as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or  
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D  
with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange  
Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your  
factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection.  
A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case  
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the  
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of  
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone  
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,  
overheating or freezing.  
Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants  
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol  
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or  
freezing.  
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These  
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine  
coolant.  
207  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap  
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery  
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and  
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles which have a  
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to  
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with  
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.  
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is  
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The  
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out  
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.  
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.  
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant  
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).  
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.  
3. Step back while the pressure releases.  
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the  
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.  
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see  
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on  
the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill  
the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.  
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly  
installed to prevent coolant loss.)  
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer  
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50  
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the  
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50  
coolant concentration.  
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant  
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If  
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and  
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.  
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per  
month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling  
system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant  
can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.  
208  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Recycled engine coolant  
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine  
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold  
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet  
available.  
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate  
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling  
and disposing of automotive fluids.  
Coolant refill capacity  
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer  
to Refill capacities in this section.  
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant  
in this section.  
Severe climates  
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34° F [–36° C ]):  
It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration  
above 50%.  
NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.  
Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will  
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the  
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate  
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the  
winter months.  
If you drive in extremely hot climates:  
It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration  
above 40%.  
NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.  
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will  
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will  
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
209  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the  
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate  
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.  
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50  
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system  
and engine protection.  
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)  
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to  
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.  
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load  
and terrain.  
How fail-safe cooling works  
If the engine begins to overheat:  
The engine coolant temperature  
gauge will move to the red (hot)  
area.  
The “CHECK GAGE” indicator  
light will illuminate.  
The “CHECK GAGE” indicator light will flash when fail-safe cooling  
mode has been activated.  
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine  
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled  
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.  
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:  
The engine power will be limited.  
The air conditioning system will be disabled.  
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine  
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to  
increase.  
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take  
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine  
damage.  
When fail-safe mode is activated  
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the  
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed  
210  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is  
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine  
damage, therefore:  
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.  
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.  
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.  
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.  
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is  
running or hot.  
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.  
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem  
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a  
service facility as soon as possible.  
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS  
Important safety precautions  
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank  
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.  
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is  
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops  
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may  
spray out and injure you or others.  
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or  
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause  
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible  
personal injury.  
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or  
mishandled.  
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.  
211  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:  
Extinguish all smoking materials  
and any open flames before  
fueling your vehicle.  
Always turn off the vehicle before  
fueling.  
Automotive fuels can be harmful  
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if  
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,  
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately  
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.  
Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind  
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,  
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious  
illness and permanent injury.  
Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,  
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and  
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could  
lead to permanent injury.  
Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is  
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated  
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or  
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.  
Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of  
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,  
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive  
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is  
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and  
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse  
reaction.  
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow  
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while  
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.  
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.  
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static  
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an  
ungrounded fuel container.  
212  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an  
ungrounded fuel container:  
Place approved fuel container on the ground.  
DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the  
cargo area).  
Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while  
filling.  
DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill  
position.  
Fuel Filler Cap  
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off  
feature.  
When fueling your vehicle:  
1. Turn the engine off.  
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn until it  
stops.  
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.  
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the  
filler pipe.  
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it stops.  
If the  
indicator comes on and stays on after you start the engine, the  
fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the engine, remove  
the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it.  
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler  
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may  
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the  
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.  
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is  
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops  
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may  
spray out and injure you or others.  
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or  
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause  
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible  
personal injury.  
213  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Choosing the right fuel  
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law  
and could damage your vehicle.  
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic  
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that  
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to  
deteriorate more rapidly. In Canada, premium grade fuel generally  
contains more metallic additives than regular fuel. We recommend using  
regular grade fuel. In Canada, many fuels contain metallic additives, but  
fuels free of such additives may be available; check with your local fuel  
dealer.  
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system  
components.  
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was  
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.  
Octane recommendations  
Your vehicle is designed to use  
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with  
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.  
87  
We do not recommend the use of  
(R+M)/2 METHOD  
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that  
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.  
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if  
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel  
with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified  
service technician to prevent any engine damage.  
Fuel quality  
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability  
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”  
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use  
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to  
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a  
qualified service technician.  
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel  
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane  
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.  
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your  
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.  
214  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter  
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved  
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.  
Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when  
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the  
World-wide Fuel Charter.  
Cleaner air  
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to  
improve air quality.  
Running out of fuel  
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse  
affect on powertrain components.  
If you have run out of fuel:  
You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after  
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to  
the engine.  
The  
indicator may come on. For more information on the  
Service engine soon indicator, refer to the Instrument Cluster  
chapter.  
Fuel Filter  
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service  
technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate  
intervals for changing the fuel filter.  
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The  
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system  
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.  
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY  
Measuring techniques  
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the  
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as  
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are  
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend  
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600  
km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate  
measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).  
215  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Filling the tank  
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to  
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities  
section of this chapter.  
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the  
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the  
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates  
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel  
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.  
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should  
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your  
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be  
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the  
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.  
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:  
Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,  
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.  
Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time  
the tank is filled.  
Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling.  
Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.  
Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.  
Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the  
same direction each time you fill up.  
Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.  
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.  
Calculating fuel economy  
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading  
(in miles or kilometers).  
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in  
gallons or liters).  
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record  
the current odometer reading.  
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer  
reading.  
216  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel  
economy:  
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.  
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total  
kilometers traveled.  
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city  
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel  
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records  
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel  
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.  
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits  
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change  
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.  
Habits  
Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.  
Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel  
economy.  
Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste  
fuel.  
Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.  
Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.  
Slow down gradually.  
Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%  
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).  
Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.  
Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.  
You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if  
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.  
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel  
economy.  
Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may  
reduce fuel economy.  
Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel  
economy.  
Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.  
217  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Maintenance  
Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.  
Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel  
economy.  
Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in  
this chapter.  
Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the  
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks  
found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide.  
Conditions  
Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy  
at any speed.  
Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately  
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).  
Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug  
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may  
reduce fuel economy.  
Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.  
Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first  
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.  
Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to  
driving on hilly terrain.  
Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top  
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.  
Close windows for high speed driving.  
EPA window sticker  
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your  
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA  
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons  
with other vehicles.  
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window  
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)  
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy  
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.  
NOTE: Vehicles over 8500 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) will not have  
fuel economy information printed on the EPA window sticker.  
218  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM  
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a  
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with  
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic  
converter and other emission control components continue to work  
properly:  
Use only the specified fuel listed.  
Avoid running out of fuel.  
Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at  
high speeds.  
Have the items listed in your Scheduled Maintenance Guide  
performed according to the specified schedule.  
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the Scheduled Maintenance  
Guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its  
emissions system.  
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for  
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting  
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine  
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.  
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry  
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine  
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.  
Illumination of the  
indicator, charging system warning light, fluid  
leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power, could indicate that  
the emission control system is not working properly.  
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially  
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.  
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By  
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,  
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not  
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent  
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on  
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the  
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up  
specifications.  
219  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty  
information.  
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)  
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s  
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On  
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the  
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet  
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists the  
service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Check  
engine/Service engine soon light illuminates, the OBD-II system has  
detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your Check  
engine/Service engine soon light to illuminate. Examples are:  
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run  
poorly.)  
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.  
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank  
with good quality fuel. After three driving cycles without these or any  
other temporary malfunctions present, the Check engine/Service engine  
soon light should turn off. (A driving cycle consists of a cold engine  
startup followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle  
service is required.  
If the Check engine/Service engine soon light remains on, have your  
vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity.  
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing  
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of  
the on-board diagnostics system. If your Check engine/Service engine  
soon light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and  
chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not  
pass the I/M test with the Check engine/Service engine soon light on.  
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,  
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test”  
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a  
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as  
described below:  
First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.  
Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with  
at least four idle periods.  
220  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the  
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The  
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,  
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.  
CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID  
Check the power steering fluid.  
Refer to the scheduled maintenance  
guide for the service interval  
schedules. If adding fluid is  
necessary, use only MERCONATF.  
Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature, 20° – 80° F (-7°  
– 25° C):  
1. Check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be between the arrows  
in the FULL COLD range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this  
range.  
2. If the fluid level is low, start the engine.  
3. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several  
times.  
4. Turn the engine off.  
For E-450 and E-550 vehicles with the Hydro-Boost Brake  
System, do not press the brake pedal after the engine has been  
turned off.  
221  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
5. Recheck the fluid level on the dipstick. Do not add fluid if the level is  
between the arrows in the FULL COLD range.  
6. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking  
the level until it reaches the FULL COLD range. Be sure to put the  
dipstick back in the reservoir.  
BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR  
The fluid level will drop slowly as  
the brakes wear, and will rise when  
the brake components are replaced.  
Fluid levels below the “MAX” line  
that do not trigger the brake system  
warning lamp are within the normal  
operating range, there is no need to  
add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range,  
the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek  
service from your dealer immediately.  
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE  
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require  
lubrication. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for  
maintenance intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with  
universal joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be  
necessary.  
TRANSMISSION FLUID  
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)  
Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide for scheduled intervals for  
fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid.  
However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not  
working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you  
notice some sign of fluid leakage.  
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an  
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating  
temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been  
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot  
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30  
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.  
1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating  
temperature.  
222  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.  
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,  
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear  
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.  
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.  
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If  
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment  
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.  
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.  
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in  
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient  
temperature.  
Low fluid level  
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid  
level is at the bottom of the dipstick  
and the ambient temperature is  
above 10°C (50°F).  
Correct fluid level  
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating  
temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal  
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 30 km (20  
miles) of driving.  
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is  
above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill  
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating  
temperature.  
The transmission fluid should be in  
this range if at normal operating  
temperature (66°C-77°C  
[150°F-170°F]).  
The transmission fluid should be in  
this range if at ambient temperature  
(10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]).  
223  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
High fluid level  
Fluid levels above the safe range  
may result in transmission failure.  
An overfill condition of transmission  
fluid may cause shift and/or  
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.  
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.  
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels  
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of  
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the  
Lubricant specifications section in this chapter.  
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause  
internal transmission component damage.  
If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler  
tube until the level is correct.  
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid  
should be removed by a qualified  
technician.  
An overfill condition of  
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns  
and/or possible damage.  
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or  
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission  
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.  
224  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Automatic transmission fluid filter (if equipped)  
The TorqShift automatic  
transmission is equipped with a  
serviceable external fluid filter  
mounted on the driver’s side of the  
transmission. Refer to the  
Scheduled Maintenance Guide for  
service intervals.  
To replace the transmission filter:  
1. Shut off the engine.  
2. Unscrew remote filter housing.  
3. Replace filter with a new authorized Motorcraft filter element. Refer to  
the Motorcraft part numbers chart in this chapter.  
4. Reinstall housing and check transmission fluid level using procedure in  
this section.  
225  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE  
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals  
for changing the air filter element.  
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter  
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.  
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not  
remove it while the engine is running.  
Changing the air filter element  
1. Disconnect the fresh air inlet tube  
from the radiator support.  
2. Open the clamp that secures the  
two halves of the air filter housing  
together.  
3. Carefully separate the two halves  
of the air filter housing.  
4. Remove the air filter element  
from the housing.  
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter  
element edges between the air filter housing. This could cause filter  
damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly  
seated.  
6. Replace the two halves of the air filter housing and secure the clamp.  
7. Connect the fresh air inlet tube to the radiator support.  
226  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS  
Component1  
4.6L V8  
engine  
5.4L V8  
engine  
6.8L V10  
engine  
Air filter element  
Battery (standard)  
Battery (auxiliary)  
Fuel filter  
FA-1634  
BXT-65-750  
BH-65DC  
FG-872  
FA-1634  
BXT-65-750  
BH-65DC  
FG-872  
FA-1634  
BXT-65-750  
BH-65DC  
FG-872  
Oil filter  
PCV valve  
Spark plugs-platinum  
FL-820-S  
FL-820-S  
FL-820-S  
2
3
Automatic  
transmission filter  
FT-145  
FT-145  
4
1Refer to the Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s  
Guide Supplement for Motorcraft diesel engine service part numbers.  
2The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items  
listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide and is essential to the life  
and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.  
For PCV valve replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service  
technician. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the  
appropriate intervals for changing the PCV valve.  
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and  
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or  
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void  
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not  
used.  
3For spark plug replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service  
technician. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the  
appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs.  
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and  
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or  
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be  
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not  
used.  
4Also available with 6.0L Diesel engine/TorqShift transmission. Part  
number is FT-145.  
227  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
REFILL CAPACITIES  
Fluid  
Ford Part  
Name  
Application  
Capacity  
Brake fluid  
Motorcraft High All  
Performance  
Fill to line on  
reservoir  
DOT 3 Motor  
Vehicle Brake  
Fluid  
Engine  
oil-gasoline  
Motorcraft SAE All  
5W-20 Premium  
6.0 quarts  
(5.7L)  
engine (includes Synthetic Blend  
filter change)9  
Motor Oil (US)  
Motorcraft SAE  
5W-20 Super  
Premium Motor  
Oil (Canada)  
Engine oil-diesel Refer to the Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo  
engine (includes Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement.  
filter change)  
228  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Fluid  
Ford Part  
Name  
Application  
Capacity  
Engine  
Motorcraft  
4.6L V8 engine 25.0 quarts  
(23.7L)  
coolant-gasoline Premium Gold  
engine  
1
Engine Coolant  
(yellow-colored)  
1 row – 23.8  
quarts (22.6L)8  
4.6L V8 engine 27.2 quarts  
with aux rear  
heat  
(25.7L)  
1 row – 26.0  
quarts (24.6L)8  
5.4L V8 engine 29.0 quarts  
(27.4L)  
1 row – 27.8  
quarts (26.3L)8  
5.4L V8 engine 31.0 quarts  
with aux rear  
heat  
(29.4L)  
1 row – 29.8  
quarts (28.3L)8  
6.8L V10 engine 30.6 quarts  
(29.0L)  
1 row – 29.4  
quarts (27.9L)8  
6.8L V10 engine 32.8 quarts  
with aux rear  
heat  
(31.0L)  
1 row – 31.6  
quarts (29.9L)8  
Engine  
coolant-diesel  
engine  
Refer to the Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo  
Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement.  
1
Power steering Motorcraft  
fluid MERCONATF  
All  
Keep in FULL  
range on  
dipstick  
229  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Fluid  
Ford Part  
Name  
Application  
Capacity  
Rear axle4  
SAE 75W-140  
Synthetic Rear  
Visteon 8.8/9.75 5.5 pints (2.6L)  
inch  
3
Axle Lubricant2 conventional and  
Traction-Lok  
SAE 75W-140  
Synthetic Rear  
Axle Lubricant  
Dana M70HD  
(M273HD)  
E-350 DSO  
Dana M60  
7.4 pints (3.5L)  
3
2
6.3 pints (3.0L)  
3
(M248)  
E-250/350 DSO  
4
limited slip  
SAE 90 Hypoid Dana Limited  
Gear Oil (axles Slip Axles  
6.3 pints (3.0L)  
3
shown are all  
limited slip)  
M60 (M248)  
E250/350  
M70FF  
4
6.8 pints (3.2L)  
3
(M267FF)  
E-350  
M70HD  
(M273HD)  
E-450  
8.3 pints (3.9L)  
3
SAE 80W-90  
Premium Rear  
Axle Lubricant  
Dana  
conventional  
axles  
6.3 pints (3.0L)  
3
M60 (M248)  
E250/350  
M70FF  
(M267FF)  
E-350  
6.6 pints (3.1L)  
3
M70HD  
(M273HD)  
E-450  
8.3 pints(3.9L )  
3
230  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Fluid  
Ford Part  
Name  
Application  
Capacity  
Fuel tank  
N/A  
All regular and  
35.0 gallons  
extended length (132.4L)  
vans and wagons  
138 inch  
37.0 gallons  
wheelbase  
(except E-Super  
Duty)  
(140.0L)  
158 inch  
37.0 gallons  
(140.0L)  
5
wheelbase  
(except E-Super  
Duty)  
176 inch  
37.0 gallons  
(140.0L)  
wheelbase  
(except E-Super  
Duty)  
158 inch and  
176 inch  
55 .0 gallons  
(208.0L)  
wheelbase  
(E-Super Duty)  
Automatic  
(4R70/75 E)  
Transmission  
fluid  
Motorcraft  
MERCONV  
ATF  
13.9 quarts  
(13.2L)  
6
7
Motorcraft  
MERCONSP  
ATF  
TorqShift  
(5–speed)  
17.5 quarts  
(16.6L)  
7
Windshield  
washer fluid  
Motorcraft  
Premium  
Windshield  
Washer  
All  
4.2 quarts  
(4.0L)  
Concentrate  
1Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.  
2If your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant it  
is considered lubricated for life. These lubricants do not need to be  
checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the  
231  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
axle assembly has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should  
be changed any time the rear axle has been submerged in water.  
Fill 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 mm to 14 mm) below bottom of fill hole.  
Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent  
meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A, for complete refill of 8.8 inch  
and 9.75 inch Traction-Lok axles.  
3Fill Dana rear axles to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 mm to 14 mm) below  
bottom of fill hole. Fill Visteon axles 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 mm to 14  
mm) below bottom of fill hole.  
4Visteon Traction-Lok axles require 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction  
Modifier XL—3 or equivalent. Dana limited-slip axles (E250/350/450/550)  
require 8 oz. (237ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL—3 or equivalent  
meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A.  
5Optional fuel tank 208L (55 gallon).  
6Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission  
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick  
handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the  
correct type. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide to determine  
the correct service interval.  
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as  
MERCONand MERCONV. These dual usage fluids are not to be used  
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCONtype  
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that  
require the MERCONV type fluid.  
MERCON, MERCONV and MERCONSP are not  
interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCON, MERCONV and  
MERCONSP. Use of dual usage fluids in an automatic  
transmission application requiring MERCONSP may cause  
transmission damage. Use of a transmission fluid other than the  
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.  
7Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary  
based on cooler size, if equipped with an in-tank cooler, if equipped an  
oil to air cooler and if equipped with a remote filter assembly. The  
amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the  
indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.  
8If your vehicle is equipped with a single row radiator, there will be a  
label on the top side of the radiator indicating “1 Row Radiator”.  
9Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine  
oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification  
WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.  
232  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS  
Item  
Ford part  
name  
Ford part  
number  
Ford  
specification  
ESA-M6C25-A  
and DOT 3  
Brake fluid  
Motorcraft High PM-1  
Performance  
DOT 3 Motor  
Vehicle Brake  
Fluid  
Door  
Silicone  
XL-6  
ESR-M13P4-A  
weatherstrips  
Lubricant  
Engine coolant Motorcraft  
Premium Gold  
VC-7-A (U.S.,  
except CA and  
WSS  
-M97B51-A1  
Engine Coolant OR), VC-7-B (CA  
(yellow-colored) and OR only)  
Motorcraft SAE XO-5W20-QSP  
5W-20 Premium (US)  
Engine  
oil-gasoline  
engine  
WSS-M2C930-A  
with API  
Synthetic Blend CXO-5W20–LSP12 Certification  
Motor Oil (US) (Canada)  
Motorcraft SAE  
5W-20 Super  
Mark  
Premium Motor  
Oil (Canada)  
Engine  
Refer to the Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo  
oil-diesel engine Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement.  
Hinges, latches, Motorcraft  
XG–4 or XL-5  
ESR-M1C159-A  
or  
ESB-M1C93–B  
Striker plates,  
fuel filler door  
hinge, and seat  
tracks  
Multi-Purpose  
Grease  
Lock cylinders Motorcraft  
Penetrating and  
Lock Lubricant  
Power steering Motorcraft  
fluid MERCONATF  
Motorcraft XL-1  
XT-2-QDX  
none  
MERCON௡  
233  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Item  
Ford part  
name  
Ford part  
number  
Ford  
specification  
Automatic  
transmission  
(4R70/75 E)  
Automatic  
transmission  
TorqShift  
Motorcraft  
MERCONV  
ATF  
Motorcraft  
MERCONSP  
ATF  
XT-5-QM  
MERCONV  
1
XT-6–QSP  
XG-3-A  
MERCONSP  
WSS-M2C919–D  
(5–speed)1  
Disc brake  
caliper rails  
Motorcraft  
Silicone Brake  
Caliper Grease  
and Dielectric  
Compound  
Motorcraft  
MERCON௡  
Automatic  
ESE-M1C171-A  
MERCON௡  
Parking brake  
assembly  
(E-450 Super  
Duty)  
XT-2-QDX  
Transmission  
Fluid  
Visteon  
conventional  
and  
Motorcraft SAE XY-75W140–QL  
75W-140  
Synthetic Rear  
WSL-M2C192–A  
WSL-M2C192–A  
Traction-Lok  
Axle Lubricant  
2
axles  
Dana M70HD  
(M273HD)  
E-350 DSO  
Dana M60  
SAE 75W-140  
Synthetic Rear  
Axle Lubricant  
XY-75W140–QL  
(M248)  
E-250/350 DSO  
limited slip3  
234  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Item  
Ford part  
name  
Ford part  
number  
Ford  
specification  
Dana Limited  
Slip Axles3  
M60 (M248)  
E-250/350  
M70FF  
SAE 90 Hypoid C6AZ-19580–E  
Gear Oil  
ESW-M2C105–E  
(M267FF)  
E-350  
M70HD  
(M273HD)  
E-450  
Dana  
SAE 80W-90  
XY-80W90–QL  
WSP-M2C197–A  
conventional  
axles  
Premium Rear  
Axle Lubricant  
M60 (M248)  
E-250/350  
M70FF  
(M267FF)  
E-350  
M70HD  
(M273HD)  
E-450  
Windshield  
washer fluid  
Motorcraft  
Premium  
ZC-32–A  
WSB-M8B16–A2  
Windshield  
Washer  
Concentrate  
1Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission  
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick  
handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the  
correct type. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide to determine  
the correct service interval.  
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as  
MERCONand MERCONV. These dual usage fluids are not to be used  
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCONtype  
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that  
require the MERCONV type fluid.  
235  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
MERCONand MERCONV type fluids are not interchangeable.  
DO NOT mix MERCONand MERCONV. Use of a transmission  
fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCONand MERCONV) in  
an automatic transmission application requiring MERCONmay  
cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the  
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.  
2Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent for  
complete refill of Visteon Traction-Lok rear axles.  
3Add 8 oz. (237 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent  
meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of Dana  
Limited Slip rear axles.  
ENGINE DATA  
4.6L V8  
engine  
281  
5.4L V8  
engine  
330  
Engine*  
6.8L V10 engine  
Cubic inches  
Required fuel  
Firing order  
415  
87 octane  
87 octane  
87 octane  
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9  
Ignition system Coil on plug  
0.052–0.056  
Spark plug gap inch  
Coil on plug  
0.052–0.056  
inch  
Coil on plug  
0.052–0.056 inch  
(1.32–1.42mm)  
(1.32–1.42mm) (1.32–1.42mm)  
Compression  
ratio  
9.4:1 9.0:1  
9.0:1  
*Refer to the Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s  
Guide Supplement for diesel engine information.  
236  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS  
Van/wagon models  
E-150 – Inches E-250 – Inches  
E-350 –  
Inches  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(1) Overall height  
(2) Track front/rear 69.4 (1763)/  
67.2(1707)  
80.7 (2050)  
83.4 (2118)  
69.4 (1763)/  
66.6 (1692)  
79.3 (2014)  
84.1 (2136)  
69.4 (1763)/  
66.4 (1687)  
(3) Overall width  
(excluding mirrors)  
(4) Wheelbase  
138.0 (3505)  
(5) Overall length  
Regular van: 211.8. (5381)  
Extended van: 231.8 (5889)  
237  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
4
5
Cutaway/commercial stripped chassis models  
E-350 – inches (mm) E-Super Duty –  
inches (mm)  
(1) Overall height  
Refer to Body Builder for specifications.  
(2) Track front/rear  
Cutaway:  
69.4 (1763)  
69.4 (1763)/  
77.7 (1974)  
SRW: 72.1 (1831)  
DRW: 73.2 (1859)  
Stripped Chassis:  
69.4 (1763)  
SRW: 66.4 (1687)  
DRW: 73.2 (1859)  
(3) Overall width  
(4) Wheelbase  
Refer to Body Builder for specifications.  
138.0 (3505)  
158.0 (4013)  
158.0 (4013)  
176.0 (4470)  
176.0 (4470)  
(5) Overall length  
Refer to Body Builder for specifications.  
238  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and Specifications  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER  
Complete Ford built vehicles  
The vehicle identification number is attached to your vehicle in the  
following places:  
On the metal tag attached to the top of the instrument panel on the  
driver’s side.  
On the certification label. This  
label is required by the National  
Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration and is made of  
special material. If it is tampered  
with, it will be destroyed or a  
destruction pattern will appear.  
Certification label for incomplete vehicles  
On completed derivations of incomplete vehicles, the certification label is  
affixed at a location determined by a subsequent stage manufacturer of  
the completed vehicle. In these cases the completed vehicle is  
manufactured in two or more stages by two or more separate  
manufacturers.  
239  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories  
Accessories  
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE  
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your  
vehicle through your local authorized Ford or Ford of Canada dealer.  
These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your  
automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style  
and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory  
is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous  
engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or  
replace any properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessory found to  
be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the  
warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective  
accessory. The accessory will be warranted for whichever provides you  
the greatest benefit:  
12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or  
the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.  
This means that Genuine Ford Accessories purchased along with your  
new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of  
your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000  
km) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy  
of the warranty.  
Not all accessories are available for all models.  
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessory products for  
your vehicle. Not all accessories are available for all models. For a  
complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle,  
please contact your dealer or visit our online store at:  
www.fordaccessoriesstore.com.  
Exterior style  
Bug shields  
Deflectors  
Exterior trim  
Fender flares  
Front end covers  
Grille inserts  
Headlamps, taillamps, fog lights and Daytime Running Lamps (DRLs)  
Running boards  
Sliding rear windows - manual and power  
240  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories  
Splash guards  
Step bars  
Tonneau covers  
Wheels  
Interior style  
Consoles  
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors  
Floor mats  
Leather wrapped steering wheels  
Scuff plates  
Speed control  
Lifestyle  
Bedliners and bedmats  
Bed tents  
Bike racks  
Cargo organization and management  
Diamond plate accessories  
Rear seat entertainment systems  
Mobile-ease hands-free communication system  
Toolboxes  
Towing mirrors  
TracRac and accessories  
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories  
Peace of mind  
First aid and highway safety kits  
Full vehicle covers  
Locking gas cap  
Navigation systems  
Keyless entry keypad  
Remote start  
241  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories  
Vehicle security systems  
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in  
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:  
When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your  
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of  
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety  
Compliance Certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight  
information.  
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio  
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile  
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and  
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such  
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC  
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service  
technician.  
Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your  
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive  
use.  
To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock  
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas  
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in  
the area of the driver’s side hood.  
Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are  
non-Genuine Ford Accessories added to the vehicle by the dealer or  
the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability.  
242  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Index  
A
replacement, specifications ...227  
servicing ..................................203  
Accessory delay ..........................57  
BeltMinder ...................................78  
Air bag supplemental restraint  
system ..........................................83  
and child safety seats ..............85  
description ................................83  
disposal ......................................87  
driver air bag ............................85  
indicator light ...........................87  
operation ...................................85  
passenger air bag .....................85  
Brakes ........................................151  
anti-lock ...................................151  
anti-lock brake system (ABS)  
warning light ...........................151  
fluid, checking and adding ....222  
fluid, refill capacities ..............228  
fluid, specifications .........233, 236  
lubricant specifications ..233, 236  
parking ....................................152  
shift interlock ..........................155  
Air cleaner filter ...............226–227  
Ambulance packages ....................8  
Break-in period .............................5  
Bulbs ............................................47  
Antifreeze  
(see Engine coolant) ................205  
Anti-lock brake system  
(see Brakes) ..............................151  
C
Audio system  
Capacities for refilling fluids ....228  
Cell phone use ............................56  
(see Radio) ....18, 20, 22, 25, 28, 33  
Automatic transmission  
driving an automatic  
overdrive .................156, 158, 161  
fluid, adding ............................222  
fluid, checking ........................222  
fluid, refill capacities ..............228  
fluid, specification ..................236  
Child safety restraints ................88  
child safety belts ......................88  
Child safety seats ........................91  
in front seat ..............................92  
in rear seat ................................92  
tether anchorage hardware .....95  
Auxiliary power point .................56  
Cleaning your vehicle  
engine compartment ..............193  
exterior ....................................195  
instrument panel ....................194  
interior .....................................195  
interior trim ............................194  
plastic parts ............................193  
safety belts ..............................195  
washing ....................................191  
waxing .....................................191  
wheels ......................................192  
wiper blades ............................194  
Axle  
lubricant specifications ..233, 236  
refill capacities ........................228  
traction lok ..............................153  
B
Battery .......................................203  
acid, treating emergencies .....203  
jumping a disabled battery ....176  
maintenance-free ....................203  
243  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Climate control (see Air  
D
conditioning or Heating) ......39, 41  
Daytime running lamps  
Clock adjust  
(see Lamps) ................................42  
6-CD in dash .................27, 30, 34  
AM/FM .......................................19  
AM/FM/CD .................................23  
AM/FM/Tape ..............................20  
Dipstick  
automatic transmission  
fluid ..........................................222  
engine oil .................................200  
Compass, electronic ....................54  
calibration .................................55  
set zone adjustment .................55  
Doors  
lubricant specifications ..........233  
Driveline universal joint and  
slip yoke ....................................222  
Console  
overhead ....................................53  
Driving under special  
conditions  
through water .........................164  
Controls  
power seat .................................68  
Coolant  
E
checking and adding ..............205  
refill capacities ................209, 228  
specifications ..................233, 236  
Emergencies, roadside  
jump-starting ..........................176  
Emergency Flashers .................166  
Emission control system ..........219  
Cruise control  
(see Speed control) ....................59  
Customer Assistance ................165  
Ford accessories for your  
vehicle .....................................196  
Ford Extended Service  
Plan ..........................................188  
Getting assistance outside the  
U.S. and Canada .....................188  
Getting roadside assistance ...165  
Getting the service you  
need .........................................182  
Ordering additional owner’s  
literature .................................189  
The Dispute Settlement  
Engine ................................236–237  
cleaning ...................................193  
coolant .....................................205  
diesel ...........................................7  
fail-safe coolant ......................210  
idle speed control ...................203  
lubrication  
specifications ..................233, 236  
refill capacities ........................228  
service points ..........................199  
starting after a collision .........166  
Engine block heater .................150  
Engine oil ..................................200  
checking and adding ..............200  
dipstick ....................................200  
filter, specifications ........202, 227  
recommendations ...................202  
Board .......................................184  
Utilizing the  
Mediation/Arbitration  
Program ...................................187  
244  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
refill capacities ........................228  
specifications ..................233, 236  
Exhaust fumes ..........................150  
Headlamps ...................................42  
bulb specifications ....................47  
daytime running lights .............42  
flash to pass ..............................43  
high beam .................................43  
replacing bulbs ...................48–49  
turning on and off ....................42  
F
Fail safe cooling ........................210  
Fluid capacities .........................228  
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles  
preparing to drive your  
vehicle .....................................153  
Fuel ............................................211  
calculating fuel economy .......215  
cap ...........................................213  
capacity ...................................228  
choosing the right fuel ...........214  
comparisons with EPA fuel  
economy estimates .................218  
detergent in fuel .....................215  
filling your vehicle with  
Heating  
heater only system .............39, 41  
heating and air conditioning  
system .......................................40  
Hood ..........................................198  
I
Ignition .......................147, 236–237  
Infant seats (see Safety seats) ..91  
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)  
testing ........................................220  
fuel ...........................211, 213, 216  
filter, specifications ........215, 227  
fuel pump shut-off switch .....166  
improving fuel economy ........215  
octane rating ...........214, 236–237  
quality ......................................214  
running out of fuel .................215  
safety information relating to  
Instrument panel  
cleaning ...................................194  
cluster ........................................12  
lighting up panel and  
interior .......................................43  
J
automotive fuels .....................211  
Jump-starting your vehicle ......176  
Fuses ..........................................168  
K
G
Keys  
Garage door opener ....................54  
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............213  
positions of the ignition .........147  
Gas mileage  
(see Fuel economy) .................215  
L
Lamps  
Gauges .........................................15  
bulb replacement  
H
specifications chart ..................47  
daytime running light ...............42  
headlamps .................................42  
Hazard flashers .........................166  
245  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
headlamps, flash to pass ..........43  
instrument panel, dimming .....43  
interior lamps ...........................46  
replacing bulbs ...................47–51  
Lane change indicator  
(see Turn signal) ........................46  
fluid, refill capacity ................228  
fluid, specifications .........233, 236  
Power Windows ...........................57  
Preparing to drive your  
vehicle ........................................153  
Lights, warning and indicator ....12  
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........151  
R
Radio ..............18, 20, 22, 25, 28, 33  
Relays ................................168, 174  
Remote entry system  
illuminated entry ................42, 66  
locking/unlocking doors ...........62  
Load limits .................................129  
Loading instructions .................134  
Lubricant specifications ...233, 236  
Lug nuts ....................................119  
Lumbar support, seats ...............68  
Roadside assistance ..................165  
M
S
Mirrors  
Safety Belt Maintenance ............82  
fold away ...................................58  
side view mirrors (power) .......57  
Safety belts  
(see Safety restraints) .........73–77  
Motorcraft parts ................215, 227  
Safety defects, reporting ..........190  
Safety restraints ....................73–77  
belt minder ...............................78  
extension assembly ..................82  
for adults .............................74–76  
for children .........................87–88  
lap belt ......................................77  
safety belt maintenance ...........82  
warning light and chime ..........78  
O
Octane rating ............................214  
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................200  
P
Parking brake ............................152  
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....227  
Safety seats for children ............91  
Seat belts  
(see Safety restraints) ...............73  
Power distribution box  
(see Fuses) ...............................171  
Seats ............................................67  
child safety seats ......................91  
front seats .................................67  
Power door locks ........................62  
Power mirrors .............................57  
Power point .................................56  
Servicing your vehicle ..............197  
Power steering ..........................152  
fluid, checking and adding ....221  
Setting the clock  
AM/FM stereo ...........................19  
246  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
AM/FM/CD .................................23  
AM/FM/In-dash 6 CD ....27, 30, 34  
AM/FM/Tape ..............................20  
Spare tire  
(see Changing the Tire) ...........112  
terminology .............................106  
tire grades ...............................106  
treadwear ........................105, 125  
Towing .......................................135  
recreational towing .................146  
trailer towing ..........................135  
wrecker ....................................181  
Spark plugs,  
specifications .............227, 236–237  
Special notice ................................9  
ambulance conversions ..............8  
diesel-powered vehicles .............7  
utility-type vehicles ....................7  
Traction-lok rear axle ...............153  
Transmission .............................155  
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....155  
fluid, checking and adding  
(automatic) .............................222  
fluid, refill capacities ..............228  
lubricant specifications ..233, 236  
Specification chart,  
lubricants ...........................233, 236  
Speed control ..............................59  
Starting your  
Turn signal ..................................46  
vehicle ........................147–148, 150  
jump starting ..........................176  
V
Steering wheel  
Vehicle dimensions ...................237  
tilting .........................................53  
Vehicle Identification Number  
(VIN) ..........................................239  
T
Vehicle loading ..........................129  
Ventilating your vehicle ...........150  
Temperature control  
(see Climate control) ...........39, 41  
Tilt steering wheel ......................53  
W
Tires ...................................105–106  
alignment ................................126  
care ..........................................125  
changing ..........................112–113  
checking the pressure ............108  
inspecting and inflating .........107  
label .........................................124  
replacing ..........................110, 115  
rotating ....................................127  
safety practices .......................126  
sidewall information ...............120  
snow tires and chains ............129  
spare tire .................................111  
Warning lights (see Lights) .......12  
Washer fluid ..............................200  
Water, Driving through .............164  
Windows  
power .........................................57  
Windshield washer fluid and  
wipers ..........................................52  
checking and adding fluid .....200  
replacing wiper blades .............52  
Wrecker towing .........................181  
247  
REVIEW COPY  
2005 Econoline (eco), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),  
Market: USA_English (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Echo Tiller TC 2100 Type 1 User Manual
Edimax Technology Network Card EU 4207 User Manual
Electro Voice Microphone 664 User Manual
Electro Voice Speaker System HPT64 User Manual
Fisher Price Baby Toy 77493 User Manual
Fisher Price Backyard Playset W2783 User Manual
Friedrich Air Conditioner 9368987053 User Manual
GBC Laminator 3064WF User Manual
GE Freezer ZIF36NM User Manual
Gemini Music Mixer PMX 05 User Manual